FIAT 2017 124 Spider Abarth compact 2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER User Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL

2017

2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH

Fourth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group

Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.

17BAFX124-126-AD

FIAT

124 SPIDER ABARTH

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

DEAR CUSTOMER

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat 124 Spider.

We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.

Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best

performance from the technical features of your vehicle.

You are advised to take the time to read these publications carefully before taking to the road for the first time, to become

familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and transmission; at the same time, you can

understand the vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.

This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care

and maintenance of your vehicle over time.

After reading it, you are advised to keep the Owner’s Manual inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it

remains in the vehicle should it be sold.

In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that FCA offers to its customers, and the detail

of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.

We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the

people at FCA.

Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!

Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all models of the vehicle; please consider only the information relevant to your vehicle’s

trim level, engine and model. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA can modify the vehicle model

described in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial purposes. For further information, contact your authorized

dealer.

Read This Carefully

REFUELING

Only refuel with unleaded gasoline with a recommended rating of 91 octane. A rating less than 87 octane is not acceptable. Do not use

gasoline containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and handling issues, as well as damage fundamental

components of the fuel supply system.

STARTING THE ENGINE

If equipped with a manual transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged; place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, fully depress the

clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

If equipped with an automatic transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that the gear selector is in PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N), depress the brake pedal, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other

flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is equipped with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the

environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Contact your authorized dealer if you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery) after buying the

vehicle. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental

friendliness and low running costs are unchanged over time.

How To Use This Manual

ESSENTIAL INFORMATION

Each time directions (left/right or forward/backwards) are listed, they are determined by facing forward from the rear of the

vehicle or as from the point of view of being seated inside the car. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly

specified in the text.

The figures in the Owner’s Manual are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not

correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Owner’s Manual has been conceived considering vehicles

with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position of

some controls or elements is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner’s Manual.

Chapters can be rapidly identified by graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A key showing the order of the chapter and

the corresponding tab symbols appears on another page.

SYMBOLS

While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.

There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which

could cause accidents or injuries.

Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

Personal Safety

Vehicle Safety

Vehicle Modifications / Alterations

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants

could be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER

If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio,

satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that burden the electrical supply, contact your authorized dealer, whose

personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required , or whether it needs to be

integrated with a more powerful battery.

Note: Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of

position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES

Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a

separate aerial is mounted externally.

Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of

EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile

phone Manufacturer.

The use of these devices inside the vehicle (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This

could compromise the vehicle safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.

If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance

of the Advanced Keyless Entry System may occur.

CELL PHONE WARNING

Note: Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country.

Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver

while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of

these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the

device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a

hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while

the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT

PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

01020304-000-100AB

Front View

1 — Wheels And Tires 3 — Headlights 5 — Convertible Top

2 — Windshield Wiper Blades 4 — Engine Compartment

REAR VIEW

01020304-001-100AB

Rear View

1 — Decklid 3 — Exterior Mirror

2 — Taillight 4 — Wheels/Tires

INSTRUMENT PANEL

02010200-129-555AB

Instrument Panel

1 — Turn Signal/High Beams Lever 4 — Hazard Warning Lights Button 7 — Driver Air Bag

2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Passenger Air Bag

3 — Windshield Wiper And Washers 6 — Ignition Switch

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

01020304-002-100AB

Interior Overview

1 — Instrument Cluster 4 — Climate Control System 7 — Seats

2 — Steering Wheel 5 — Transmission Gear Selector 8 — Radio Controls

3 — Radio Systems 6 — Parking Brake

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS ....................14

IGNITION SWITCH ............20

ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......22

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......24

DOORS...................27

SEATS ...................33

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINTS ...............34

STEERING WHEEL ...........35

MIRRORS .................35

EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...........38

WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER .42

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....44

POWER WINDOWS ...........56

HOMELINK — IF EQUIPPED .....58

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........60

TRUNKLID ................65

TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE . . .67

HOOD ...................68

CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) . .69

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ....73

ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

SYSTEMS .................73

KEYS

Key Fob

A code number is stamped on the plate

attached to the key set; detach this

plate and store it in a safe place (not in

the vehicle) for use if you need to make

a replacement Emergency Key.

Also, write down the code number and

keep it in a separate safe and

convenient place, but not in the vehicle.

If your key fob is lost, contact an

authorized dealer and have your code

number ready.

Note: Your key fob configuration may

vary with different feature button icons

as well as the total number of feature

buttons depending on your vehicle

options/features. Key fob example as

shown.

To use the Emergency Key, push the

mechanical latch on the back side of

the key fob and pull the emergency key

out that's housed inside the key fob.

Note:

Always keep a spare key fob in

case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, see

an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

The driver must carry the key fob to

ensure the Keyless Entry System

functions properly.

Warning!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the

automatic transmission into PARK or the

manual transmission into FIRST gear or

REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the

engine OFF, remove the key fob from the

vehicle and lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake,

brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

04010100-361-002AB

Key Fob

1 — Emergency Key

2 — Key Fob

3 — Key Code Number Plate

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Key Fob Functions

With A Vehicle Security Alarm

System

The hazard warning lights flash when

the vehicle security alarm system is

armed or disarmed.

With Advanced Keyless Function

A beep can be heard for confirmation

when the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel

filler door are locked/unlocked using the

key fob. The beep indication volume

can be adjusted or turned off.

Use the following procedure to change

the beep setting:

1. Verify or place the ignition in the OFF

position and close both of the doors

and the trunk lid.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Within 30 seconds of opening the

driver's door, push and hold the lock

button on the key fob for five seconds

or longer.

Note:

Both of the doors, the trunk lid, and

fuel filler door will lock and the beep

sound activates at the currently set

volume (if the beep is currently set to

not activate, it will not activate).

The setting changes each time the

lock button on the key fob is pushed

and the beep sound activates at the

set volume (if the beep sound has

been set to not activate, it will not

activate).

Setting change is completed by doing

any one of the following:

Placing the ignition to ACC or ON

position.

Closing the driver's door.

Opening the trunk lid.

Not operating the key fob for ten

seconds.

Pushing any button, except the lock

button on the key fob.

Pushing a request switch on the

exterior door handle.

Note: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With

Advanced Keyless Entry Function —

If Equipped” in “Doors” for further

information.

The operation indicator light flashes

when the buttons are pushed.

Key Fob Buttons

Lock Button

To lock the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel

filler door, push the lock button and the

hazard warning lights will flash once

and a beep will be heard.

Unlock Button

To unlock the doors and the trunk lid,

push the unlock button and the hazard

warning lights will flash twice.

The system can be set to unlock both

doors. Use the following procedure to

change the setting:

1. Place the ignition in the OFF position

and close both of the doors and the

trunk lid.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Within 30 seconds of opening the

driver's door, push and hold the unlock

button on the key fob for five seconds

or longer.

Note: The sound of the doors

locking/unlocking can be heard. After

this, the system changes the setting

each time the unlock button is pushed

(the sound of the doors locking/

unlocking can be heard).

The setting change can be

completed by doing any one of the

following:

1. Placing the ignition in the ACC or

ON position.

2. Closing the driver’s door.

3. Opening the trunk lid.

4. Not operating the key fob for ten

seconds.

5. Pushing any button except the

unlock button on the key fob.

6. Pushing a request switch on the

exterior door handle.

Trunk Button

To open the trunk lid, push and hold the

trunk button until the trunk lid opens.

Panic Button

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or

off, push and hold the panic button on

the key fob for at least one second and

release. When the Panic Alarm is on,

the headlights will turn on, the park

lights will flash, the horn will pulse on

and off, and the turn signal lights will

flash.

Note: The panic button will work

whether any door or the trunk lid is

open or closed.

Turning On The Alarm

Pushing the panic button for one

second or more will trigger the alarm for

about two minutes and thirty seconds,

and the following will occur:

The horn sounds intermittently.

The hazard warning lights flash.

Turning Off The Alarm

The alarm will stop by pushing any

button on the key fob.

Operational Range

The system operates only when the

driver is in the vehicle or within

operational range while the key fob is

being carried or on your person.

Starting The Engine

Starting the engine may be possible

even if the key fob is outside of the

vehicle and extremely close to a door

and window, however, always start the

engine from the driver's seat.

If the vehicle is started and the key fob

is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not

restart after it is shut off and the ignition

is placed in the OFF position.

The trunk is out of the assured

operational range, however, if the key

fob is operable the engine will start.

Key Fob Antenna Location

Note: The engine may not start if the

key fob is placed in or around the

following areas:

Around The Instrument Panel

In The Storage Compartments

Key Suspend Function

If a key fob is left in the vehicle, the

functions of the key fob left in the

vehicle are temporarily suspended to

prevent unlawful use of the vehicle.

To restore the functions, push the

unlock button on the functions-

suspended key fob left in the vehicle.

04010202-12R-001

Key Fob Antenna Location

1 — Interior Antenna

2 — Operational Range

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Key Fob Battery

Replacement

If the buttons on the key fob are

inoperable and the indicator light does

not flash, the battery power level may

be low or discharged.

Replace with a new battery

(CR2025 type) before the key fob

becomes unusable.

The following conditions indicate that

the battery power is low:

Indicator light (green) flashes in

the instrument cluster for about

30 seconds after the engine is placed in

the OFF position.

The system does not operate and

the operation indicator light on the key

fob does not flash when the buttons are

pushed.

The system's operational range is

reduced.

Note: Replacing the battery at an

authorized dealer is recommended to

prevent damage to the key fob. If

replacing the battery by yourself, follow

the instruction below.

Replacing The Key Fob Battery

Proceed as follows:

1. Push the mechanical release button

and remove the emergency key.

1 — Key Fob Case With Mechanical

Release Button

2 — Emergency Key

2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw

driver, or the tip of your emergency key

into the now exposed slot and carefully

pry in the direction of the arrows to

open the cover (3) slightly.

3. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw

driver, or the tip of your emergency key

into the side gap and carefully pry in the

direction of the arrow to open the cover

(4).

07031301-361-002

Emergency Key Removed

07031301-362-002

3 — Pry Case Left Side

07031301-363-002

4 — Pry Case Right Side

4. Separate the key fob case, then

remove the battery.

3 — Key Fob Case

5 — Key Fob Battery

5. Insert a new battery with the positive

pole facing up. Then, cover the battery

with the battery cap.

6. Close the cover and reinsert the

Emergency Key.

Note: Be careful not to allow the

rubber ring shown in call-out (6) to be

scratched or damaged. If the rubber

ring comes out, reinstall it before

inserting a new battery.

Engine Start Function

When Key Fob Battery Is

Discharged

When starting the engine by holding the

key fob over the keyless ignition

START/STOP button due to a

discharged key fob battery or a

malfunctioning key fob, be careful not

to allow the following, otherwise the

signal from the key fob will not be

received correctly and the engine may

not start:

Metal parts of other key fobs or

metal objects touch the key fob.

Spare key fobs or key fobs for other

vehicles equipped with an immobilizer

system touch or come near the key .

Devices for electronic purchases, or

security passage touch or come near

the key fob.

07031301-364-003

Remove Back Cover For Battery

Replacement

07031301-367-001

6 — Install New Battery

05010201-KY1-001AB

No Keys Touching The Key Fob

05010201-KY2-001AB

No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the engine cannot be started due to a

discharged key fob battery, the engine

can be started using the following

procedure:

1. Continue to depress the brake pedal

firmly until the engine has completely

started.

2. Manual Transmission: continue to

depress the clutch pedal firmly until the

engine has completely started.

3. Verify that the keyless ignition start

indication light (green) flashes.

4. Touch the keyless ignition

START/STOP button using the

backside of the key fob while the

keyless ignition start indicator light

(green) flashes.

5. Verify that the keyless ignition start

indicator light (green) turns on.

6. Push the keyless ignition

START/STOP button to start the

engine.

When touching the keyless ignition

START/STOP button using the backside

of the key fob as shown in the illustration,

touch the keyless ignition START/STOP

button with the lock switch side of the

key fob facing up.

The engine cannot be started unless the

clutch pedal is fully depressed (manual

transmission) or the brake pedal is fully

depressed (automatic transmission).

If there is a malfunction with the keyless

ignition START/STOP button function,

the keyless ignition start indicator light

(amber) flashes. In this case, the engine

may start, however contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

If the keyless ignition start indicator light

(green) does not illuminate, perform the

operation from the beginning again. If it

does not illuminate contact an

authorized dealer.

To change the ignition position without

starting the engine, perform the following

operations after the keyless ignition start

indicator light (green) turns on:

1. Release the clutch pedal (manual

transmission) or brake pedal (automatic

transmission).

Push the keyless ignition START/STOP

button to change the ignition position. The

ignition cycles in the order of ACC, ON,

and OFF each time the keyless ignition

START/STOP button is pushed.

Note: To change the ignition position

again, perform the operation from the

beginning.

Emergency Operation For Starting

The Engine

If the key warning light (red) illuminates,

or the keyless ignition start indicator

light (amber) flashes, this could indicate

that the engine may not start using the

usual starting method. Contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

If this occurs, the engine can be

force-started. push and hold the keyless

ignition START/STOP button until the

engine starts.

Other procedures necessary for starting

the engine such as having the key fob

in the vehicle, and depressing the

clutch pedal (manual transmission) or

the brake pedal (automatic

transmission) are required.

05010201-L12-001AB

Discharged Key Fob Battery Start

Procedure

Key Fob Cautions

Because the key fob uses low-intensity

radio waves, it may not function

correctly under the following conditions:

The key fob is carried with

communication devices such as cellular

phones.

The key fob contacts or is covered

by a metal object.

The key fob is near electronic

devices such as personal computers.

Non-FCA genuine electronic

equipment is installed in the vehicle.

There is equipment which discharges

radio waves near the vehicle.

The key fob may consume battery

power excessively if it receives

high-intensity radio waves. Do not place

the key fob near electronic devices

such as televisions or personal

computers.

To avoid damage to the key fob, DO

NOT:

Drop the key fob.

Get the key fob wet.

Disassemble the key fob unless

replacing battery.

Expose the key fob to high

temperatures on places such as the

instrument panel or engine

compartment, under direct sunlight.

Expose the key fob to any kind of

magnetic field.

Place heavy objects on the key fob.

Put the key fob in an ultrasonic

cleaner.

Put any magnetized objects close to

the key fob.

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH

Push Button Start

Positions

The system operates only when the key

fob is within operational range.

Each time the keyless ignition

START/STOP button is pushed, the

ignition cycles in the order of OFF, ACC,

and ON. Pushing the START/STOP

button again from ON position cycles

the ignition to the OFF position.

Note:

The engine starts by pushing the

keyless ignition START/STOP button

while depressing the clutch pedal

(manual transmission) or the brake

pedal (automatic transmission). To

change the ignition position, push the

keyless ignition START/STOP button

without depressing the clutch or brake

pedal.

05010101-L12-001AB

Keyless START/STOP Ignition

Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Do not leave the ignition in the ON

position while the engine is not

running, doing so could result in the

battery being discharged. If the ignition

is left in ACC position (for automatic

transmission, the gear selector is in the

P position, and the ignition is in ACC),

the ignition cycles to the OFF position

automatically after about 25 minutes.

OFF

The power supply to electrical devices

turns off and the keyless ignition start

indicator light (amber) also turns off. In

the OFF position, the steering wheel is

locked.

ACC (Accessory)

Some electrical accessories will operate

and the indicator light (amber)

illuminates. In the ACC position, the

steering wheel is unlocked.

The Keyless Entry System does not

function while the keyless ignition has

been placed in the ACC position, and

the doors will not lock/unlock even if

they have been locked manually.

This is the normal running position after

the engine is started.

Note: The indicator light (amber) turns

off (the indicator light amber illuminates

when the ignition has been placed in

the ON position and the engine is not

running).

Some indicator lights/warning lights

should be inspected before the engine

is started.

When the keyless ignition has been

placed in the ON position, the sound of

the fuel pump motor operating near the

fuel tank can be heard. This does not

indicate an abnormality.

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as a

substitute for the parking brake. Always

apply the parking brake fully when exiting

the vehicle to guard against vehicle

movement and possible injury or damage.

When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake,

brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in

the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fully

disengaged before driving; failure to do so

can lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brake when

leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause

damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the

transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may

allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or

injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake

engaged, or repeated use of the parking

brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious

damage to the brake system.

ADVANCED

KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED

Advanced Keyless Entry

System

The Advanced Keyless Entry System is

an enhancement that allows you to

lock/unlock the doors, trunk lid, fuel

filler door, and opens the trunk lid with

the slow and careful push of a button.

The Advanced Keyless Entry System

allows the driver to START/STOP the

ignition with the push of a button as

long as the key fob is in the passenger

compartment.

If equipped, the vehicle security alarm

system may be armed/disarmed with

the push of the lock/unlock button

located on the key fob.

System Malfunctions/Warnings

System malfunctions or warnings are

indicated by the following warning lights

or beeps (refer to “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” for further

information) :

Warning Light (Red)

Ignition Not Turned OFF Warning

Beep

Key Fob Removed From Vehicle

Warning Beep

Request Switch Inoperable Warning

Beep

Key Fob Left-In-Trunk Warning Beep

Key Fob Left-In-Vehicle Warning

Beep

If you have a problem with the key fob,

or the key fob is lost or stolen, contact

an authorized dealer as soon as

possible for a replacement and to make

the lost or stolen key fob inoperative.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

The Advanced Keyless Entry

System operational range may vary

due to local weather conditions.

The Advanced Keyless Entry

System is fully operational (door/trunk

lid/fuel filler door lock/unlock) when the

ignition is placed in the OFF position.

The Advanced Keyless Entry System

does not operate if the ignition is

placed to any position other than the

OFF position.

If the key fob does not operate when

pushing a button, the operational range

becomes too small, or the warning light

does not illuminate or flash, the battery

may be weak or discharged. To install a

new battery, refer to “Key Fob Battery

Replacement.”

Battery life is about one year.

Replace the battery with a new one if

the

Warning light (green) flashes in

the instrument cluster. Replacing the

battery about once a year is

recommended because the

Warning light may not illuminate or

flash if the battery is low or discharged.

Additional key fobs may be

obtained at an authorized dealer. Up to

six key fobs may be used with the

Advanced Keyless Entry System per

vehicle. Bring all key fobs to an

authorized dealer when additional keys

are required.

The Advanced Keyless Entry function

allows you to lock/unlock the door,

trunk lid, and fuel filler door, or open the

trunk lid while carrying the key fob.

Warning!

Radio waves from the key fob may affect

medical devices such as pacemakers:

before using the key fob near people who

use medical devices, ask the medical

device manufacturer or your physician if

radio waves from the key fob will affect the

device.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Note: The Advanced Keyless Entry

System functions can be deactivated to

prevent any possible adverse effect on

a user wearing a pacemaker or other

medical device. If the system is

deactivated, you will be unable to start

the engine by carrying the key fob.

Contact an authorized dealer for

details. If the Advanced Keyless Entry

System has been deactivated, you can

start the engine by following the

procedure indicated when the key fob

battery becomes discharged.

Operational Range

The system operates only when the

driver is in the vehicle or within

operational range while the key fob is

being carried.

Note:

When the battery power is low, or

in places where there are high-intensity

radio waves or noise, the operational

range may become narrower or the

system may not operate.

Locking/Unlocking The Doors And

The Trunk Lid

Note: The system may not operate if

you are too close to the windows or

door handles.

Opening The Trunk Lid

04010202-12S-002

Advanced Keyless Entry Sensors

1 — Interior Antenna

2 — Operational Range

04020201-12A-003

Request Switch Door Functions

1 — Exterior Antenna

2 — Operational Range

3 — Distance (31 inches)

04020202-12A-003

Electronic Trunk Release

1 — Exterior Antenna

2 — Operational Range

3 — Distance (31 inches)

General Information

The following regulatory statement

applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY

ALARM SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

Modifications And

Add-On Equipment

FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizer

and the vehicle security alarm system

operation if the system has been

modified or if any add-on equipment

has been installed.

Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle,

do not modify the system or install any

add-on equipment to the immobilizer

and the vehicle security alarm system

or the vehicle.

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system allows the

engine to start only with a key fob the

system recognizes.

If someone attempts to start the engine

with an unrecognized key fob, the

engine will not start, thereby helping to

prevent unlawful vehicle use.

If you have a problem with the

immobilizer system or the key fob,

contact an authorized dealer.

To avoid damage to the key fob, do not:

Drop the key fob.

Get the key fob wet.

Expose the key fob to any kind of

magnetic field.

Expose the key fob to high

temperatures on places such as the

instrument panel, hood, or under direct

sunlight.

Note:

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

If the engine does not start with the

correct key fob, and the

warning

light keeps illuminating or flashing, the

system may have a malfunction.

Contact an authorized dealer.

The key fobs carry a unique

electronic code. For this reason, and to

assure your safety, obtaining a

replacement key fob can only be done

through your authorized dealer, and will

require some waiting time.

Always keep a spare key fob in

case one is lost. If a key fob is lost,

contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

If you lose a key fob, an authorized

dealer will reset the electronic codes of

your remaining key fobs and

immobilizer system. Bring all the

remaining key fobs to an authorized

dealer to reset. Starting the vehicle

with a key fob that has not been reset

is not possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Operation

The engine may not start and

warning light may illuminate or flash

if the key fob is placed in an area where

it is difficult for the system to detect the

signal, such as on the instrument panel.

Move the key fob to a location within

the signal range, cycle the ignition off,

and then restart the engine.

Note: Signals from a TV, radio station,

transceiver, or mobile telephone could

interfere with your immobilizer system. If

you are using the proper key fob and

the engine fails to start, check the

warning light.

Arming

The system is armed when the ignition

is cycled from the ON to OFF position.

The

warning light in the instrument

cluster flashes every two seconds until

the system is disarmed.

Disarming

The system is disarmed when the

ignition is placed in the ON position with

the correct programmed key fob. The

warning light illuminates for about

three seconds and then turns off. If the

engine does not start with the correct

key fob, and the

warning light

remains illuminated or flashing, try the

following:

Make sure the key fob is within the

operational range for signal

transmission.

Cycle the ignition off, and then restart

the engine. If the engine does not start

after three or more tries, contact an

authorized dealer.

Note:

If the warning light flashes

continuously while you are driving, do

not turn the engine OFF. Contact an

authorized dealer and have it checked.

If the engine is shut off while the

warning light is flashing, you will

not be able to restart it.

Because the electronic codes are

reset when the immobilizer system is

repaired, the keys are needed. Make

sure to bring all the key fobs to an

authorized dealer so that they can be

programmed.

Vehicle Security Alarm

System — If Equipped

If the vehicle security alarm system

detects an inappropriate entry into the

vehicle or the intrusion sensor detects

movement in the vehicle which could

result in the vehicle or its contents

being stolen, the alarm alerts the

surrounding area of an abnormality by

sounding the siren/horn and flashing

the hazard warning lights.

The system will not function unless it's

properly armed. So when you leave the

vehicle, follow the arming procedure

correctly.

Siren/Horn Triggering Conditions

The siren/horn sounds intermittently

and the hazard warning lights flash for

about 30 seconds when the system is

triggered by any one of the following:

Unlocking a door with an inside

door-lock knob.

Forcing open a door, the engine

compartment or the trunk lid.

Opening the hood by operating the

hood release handle.

Placing the ignition in the ON position

without starting the engine.

With the intrusion sensor: the

intrusion sensor detects a movement in

the vehicle.

The system will be triggered again (up

to ten times) if one of the above

conditions remains.

The trunk lid will not open when the

vehicle security alarm system is

activated.

If the battery becomes drained while

the vehicle security alarm system is

armed, the siren will activate and the

hazard warning lights will flash during

the battery charging or replacement

process.

How To Arm The System

Close the windows and the

convertible top securely.

Place the ignition in the OFF position.

Make sure the engine compartment,

convertible top, the doors, and the

trunk lid are closed.

Push the lock button on the key fob

or lock the driver's door from the

outside with the emergency key. The

hazard warning lights will flash once.

With The Advanced Keyless Entry

function: push a request switch. The

warning light in the instrument

panel flashes twice per second for

20 seconds. After 20 seconds the

system is fully armed.

The vehicle security alarm system can

also be armed by activating the auto

re-lock function with all the doors, the

trunk lid and the engine compartment

closed.

The system will disarm if one of the

following operations takes place within

20 seconds after pushing the lock

button: To rearm the system, perform

the arming procedure again.

1. Unlocking any door.

2. Opening any door.

3. Opening the engine compartment.

4. Placing the ignition in the ON

position.

The hazard warning lights will flash

once to indicate that the vehicle

security alarm system is armed when

the doors are locked by pushing the

lock button on the key fob, or using the

emergency key.

Note:

If any door or trunk lid remains

closed for 30 seconds, the doors, and

trunk lid automatically re-lock and the

vehicle security alarm system arms

even if a window open or the

convertible top is left down.

To reactivate the intrusion sensor,

turn off the armed vehicle security

alarm system and then rearm it.

The intrusion sensor is operational

when the vehicle security alarm system

is armed. To cancel the intrusion

sensor, push the intrusion sensor

cancel button each time the vehicle

security alarm system is armed.

To Turn Off An Armed System

An armed system can be turned off

using any one of the following methods:

Pushing the unlock button on the key

fob.

Starting the engine with the keyless

ignition START/STOP button.

With The Advanced Keyless Entry

function: pushing a request switch on

the exterior door handles.

Note: When the doors are unlocked by

pushing the unlock button on the key

fob while the vehicle security alarm

system is turned off, the hazard

warning lights will flash twice to indicate

that the system is turned off.

To Stop The Alarm

A triggered alarm can be turned off

using any one of the following methods:

Pushing the unlock button on the key

fob

Starting the engine with the keyless

ignition START/STOP button

With The Advanced Keyless Entry

function: pushing a request switch on

the exterior door handles or the electric

trunk release while the key fob is being

carried.

The hazard warning lights will flash

twice.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DOORS

Lock/Unlock With

Emergency Key

Both doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock

automatically when the driver's door is

locked using the emergency key.

Lock With Emergency Key — Insert

key into driver’s door and turn to the left

(toward front of car).

Unlock With Emergency Key —

Insert key into driver’s door and turn to

the right (toward back of car).

They both unlock when the driver's

door is unlocked using the emergency

key.

Turn the emergency key toward the

front to lock, toward the back to unlock.

Caution!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for

thieves. Always remove key fob from the

vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the

vehicle unattended.

Manual Lock/Unlock

Knob

Operation From Inside

To lock any door from the inside, push

the door-lock knob. To unlock, pull it

outward. This does not operate the

other door locks.

Note: The red indication can be seen

when the door-lock knob is unlocked.

Operation From Outside

To lock the passenger door with the

door-lock knob from the outside, push

the door-lock knob to the lock position

and close the door (holding the door

handle in the open position is not

required).

Note: When locking the door this way,

be careful not to leave the key fob

inside the vehicle. The driver's door

lock knob cannot be used while the

driver's door is open.

Warning!

For personal security and safety in the

event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors

before you drive as well as when you park

and leave the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle. If equipped with Advanced Keyless

Entry, always make sure the keyless ignition

is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from

the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may

cause severe personal injuries or death.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake,

brake pedal or the gear selector.

04030107-L21-001AB

Inside Door-Lock Knob

1 — Door Knob Lock Position (Red

Indicator Not Seen When Locked)

2 — Door Knob Unlock Position (Red

Indicator Seen When Unlocked)

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children, and do not leave the ignition of a

vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless

Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN positions. A

child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

Central Lock/Unlock

Both doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock

automatically when the lock rocker

switch is pushed with both doors

closed.

Note:

The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel

filler door cannot be locked while any

other door is open.

The key fob may not be able to be

detected by the vehicle keyless-go

system if it is located next to a mobile

phone, laptop or other electronic

device; these devices may block the

key fob’s wireless signal and prevent

the keyless-go system from starting

the vehicle.

Both unlock when the unlock rocker

switch is pushed.

Note: The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel

filler door cannot be locked while any

other door is open.

Double Locking System

— If Equipped

The double locking system is designed

to prevent someone who has broken

into your vehicle from opening the door

from the inside. If you have any

problems with the double locking

system, contact an authorized dealer.

System Activation

Proceed as follows:

1. Close both the windows and the

convertible top.

2. Place the ignition in the OFF position

and take the key fob with you.

3. Close both doors and trunk lid.

4. Insert the emergency key in the

driver's door, turn the emergency key to

the lock position (counter

clockwise/left), and return it to the

center position. Then turn it to the lock

position (counter clockwise/left) again

within three seconds.

5. The

indicator light illuminates for

about three seconds to indicate that the

system has been activated.

The system can be activated by

pushing the lock button on the key fob

twice within three seconds.

With The Advanced Keyless

Function: the system can be activated

by pushing the request switch on the

exterior door handle twice within three

seconds.

Note: The system cannot be activated

when any door is open.

04030105-12D-002

Central/Power Door Lock Switch

04030102-12A-001

Emergency Key Lock Procedure

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

System Deactivation

Unlock the driver's door or place the

ignition in the ON position. If the power

supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the

battery is disconnected), the system

can only be deactivated by unlocking a

door with the emergency key.

Lock/Unlock With

Advanced Keyless Entry

Function — If Equipped

Both doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler

door can be locked/unlocked by

pushing the request switch on the

exterior door handle while the key fob is

being carried.

To Lock

To lock the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel

filler door, push the request switch on

the exterior door handle and the hazard

warning lights will flash once.

A beep sound will be heard once.

To Unlock

Driver's door request switch located on

the exterior door handle.

To unlock the doors, trunk lid, and the

fuel filler door, push the request switch

on the exterior door handle and the

hazard warning lights will flash twice.

To unlock both doors and the fuel filler

door, push the request switch on the

exterior door handle again within three

seconds and two more beep sounds

will be heard.

Front Passenger Door Request

Switch:

To unlock both doors and the fuel filler

door, push the request switch on the

exterior door handle. A beep sound will

be heard twice and the hazard warning

lights will flash twice.

Note:

Confirm that both doors, and the

fuel filler door are securely locked.

For the trunk lid, move it without

pushing the electric trunk lid opener to

verify that the trunk lid has not been

left open.

Both doors and the fuel filler door

cannot be locked when any door is

open.

It may require a few seconds for the

doors to unlock after the request

switch on the exterior door handle is

pushed.

The key fob may not be able to be

detected by the vehicle keyless-go

system if it is located next to a mobile

phone, laptop or other electronic

device; these devices may block the

key fob’s wireless signal and prevent

the keyless-go system from starting

the vehicle.

A beep sound is heard for confirmation

when the doors, and fuel filler door are

locked/unlocked using the request

switch on the exterior door handle. If

you prefer, the beep sound can be

turned off.

The volume of the beep sound can also

be changed. Use the following

procedure to change the setting:

1. Place the ignition in the OFF position

and close both of the doors and the

trunk lid.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Within 30 seconds of opening the

driver's door, push and hold the lock

button on the key fob for five seconds

or longer. The doors, and fuel filler door

will lock, an audible beep will activate at

the currently set volume (if the beep

sound is currently set to not activate, it

will not activate). The setting changes

each time the lock button on the key

fob is pushed and the beep sound

activates at the set volume (if the beep

sound has been set to not activate, it

will not activate).

04000098-121-555

Request Switch On Exterior Door

Handle

4. The setting change is completed by

doing any one of the following:

Place the ignition in the ACC or ON

position.

Closing the driver's door.

Opening the trunk lid.

Not operating the key fob for ten

seconds.

Pushing any button except the lock

button on the key fob.

Pushing a request switch on the

exterior door handle.

With Vehicle Security Alarm System

The hazard warning lights flash when

the vehicle security alarm system is

armed or disarmed (refer to “Vehicle

Security Alarm System” found in

“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for

further information).

The setting can be changed so that the

doors and the fuel filler door are locked

automatically without pushing the

request switch on the exterior door

handle, (refer to “Personalization

Features” section in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” for further

information).

Auto-Lock Function

A beep sound is heard when both

doors are closed while the key is being

carried. Both doors, the trunk lid, and

fuel door are locked automatically after

about three seconds when the

Advanced Keyless Entry key fob is out

of the operational range.

The hazard warning lights will flash

once (even if the driver is in the

operational range, both doors, trunk lid,

and the fuel filler door are locked

automatically after about 30 seconds).

If you are out of the operational range

before the doors and the trunk lid are

completely closed or another key fob is

left in the vehicle, the auto-lock function

will not work.

Always make sure that both doors and

the trunk lid are closed and locked

before leaving the vehicle. The

auto-lock function does not close the

power windows.

Auto Re-Lock Function

After unlocking with the request switch

on the exterior door handle, both doors,

and the fuel filler door will automatically

lock if any of the following operations

are not performed within about

60 seconds.

If your vehicle has a vehicle security

alarm system, the hazard warning lights

will flash for confirmation.

The time required for the doors to lock

automatically can be changed (refer to

“Personalization Features” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

further information).

Opening a door or the trunk lid.

Placing the ignition in any position

other than the OFF position.

Locking/Unlocking With A Key Fob

Both doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler

door can be locked/unlocked by

operating the keyless entry system key

fob: refer to “Keyless Entry System” in

“Keys” for further information.

Locking/Unlocking With Door-Lock

Switch

Both doors and the fuel filler door lock

automatically when the lock side is

pushed. They unlock when the unlock

side is pushed.

To lock both the doors and the fuel filler

door from an open door, push the lock

side of the door lock switch and then

close the door.

Note: When locking the doors this

way, be careful not to leave the key fob

inside the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Auto Lock/Unlock Function — If Equipped

When the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), both doors, and fuel filler door lock automatically.

When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, both doors, and fuel filler door unlock automatically.

These functions can also be disabled so that they do not operate.

Auto Lock/Unlock Function Setting Change Using Door-Lock Switch (With Door-Lock Switch)

The doors, and fuel filler door can be set to lock or unlock automatically by selecting any one of the functions from the following

table and using the door-lock switch on the interior door panel. There are only a total of six auto lock/unlock settings available

for automatic transmission vehicles, and three for manual transmission vehicles. Be sure to push the unlock side of the driver's

door-lock switch the correct number of times according to the selected function number. If the switch is mistakenly pushed

seven times on an automatic transmission vehicle or four times on a manual transmission, the procedure will be cancelled. If

this occurs, start the procedure from the beginning.

Function Number Function (*)

1 The auto door-lock function is disabled.

Both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH

(20 km/h) or more.

Both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH

(20 km/h) or more. Both the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door unlock when the ignition is

cycled from the ON to OFF position.

Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position and the

gear selector is shifted from park (P) to any other gear position, both the doors, and fuel filler door

lock automatically.

Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position and the

gear selector is shifted from PARK (P) to any other gear position, both the doors, and the fuel filler

door lock automatically. When the dear selector is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in

the ON position, both the doors, and the fuel filler door unlock automatically.

Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock

automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH (20 km/h) or more. When the gear selector

is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, both the doors, and the fuel

filler door unlock automatically.

(*) For other settings for the auto door lock function contact an authorized dealer.

Note: Function number 3 is the factory setting for your vehicle.

Settings Changing

Settings can be changed using the

following procedure:

1. Safely park the vehicle. Both doors

must remain closed.

2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

3. Push and hold the lock side of the

driver's door-lock switch within

20 seconds of placing the ignition in the

ON position, and make sure a beep

sound is heard about eight seconds

afterwards.

4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock

function setting table, determine the

function number for the desired setting.

Push the unlock side of the driver's

door-lock switch the same number of

times as the selected function number

(example: if you select function 2, push

the unlock side of the switch only two

times).

5. Three seconds after the function

setting has been changed, a beep

sound will beep in the amount of the

selected function number (example:

Function number 3 = three beep

sounds).

Automatic Transmission Vehicles

The doors cannot be locked or

unlocked while the setting function is

being performed.

The procedure can be cancelled by

pushing the lock side of the door-lock

switch.

Note:

The vehicle lock-out prevention

feature prevents you from locking

yourself out of the vehicle. Both doors,

trunk lid, and the fuel filler door will

automatically unlock if they are locked

using the power door locks with any

door open. If both the doors are closed

even though the trunk lid is open, both

the doors and the fuel filler door will

lock.

Door Unlock (Control) System

With Collision Detection —

If Equipped: this system automatically

unlocks the doors, trunk lid, and the

fuel filler door in the event the vehicle is

involved in an accident to allow

passengers to get out of the vehicle

immediately and prevent being trapped

inside. While the ignition is placed in

the ON position and in the event the

vehicle receives an impact strong

enough to inflate the air bags, both the

doors, the trunk lid, and fuel filler door

are automatically unlocked after about

six seconds have elapsed from the

time of the accident. The doors, trunk

lid, and the fuel filler door may not

unlock depending on how an impact is

applied, the force of the impact, and

other conditions of the accident. If

door-related systems or the battery is

malfunctioning, the doors, trunk lid,

and the fuel filler door will not unlock.

When opening a door, the power

windows open a little automatically.

When closing the door, the power

windows close automatically. This is a

function for improving the sealing of the

window, and it does not mean there is a

problem. If the vehicle battery is

disconnected for vehicle maintenance or

other reasons, the power windows will

not open or close automatically. If the

power windows do not open or close,

the automatic open/close mechanism

for the windows must be reset.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SEATS

Manual Adjustment

Forward / Rearward

To move the seat forward or rearward,

pull the adjustment bar. Release the bar

once the desired position is reached.

Using body pressure, move forward

and rearward on the seat to be sure

that the seat adjusters have latched.

Height

To adjust the height for front edge of

the seat bottom, rotate the dial to the

desired position.

Seat Recline

To recline the seatback, lift up the

recline lever and lean back until the

desired position has been reached,

then release the lever. Make sure the

lever returns to its original position and

the seatback is locked in place by

attempting to push it forward and

rearward.

Warning!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be

dangerous. Moving a seat while driving

could result in loss of control which could

cause a collision and serious injury or

death.

Seats should be adjusted before

fastening the seat belts and while the

vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death

could result from a poorly adjusted seat

belt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined

so that the shoulder belt is no longer

resting against your chest. In a collision you

could slide under the seat belt, which could

result in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats

On some models, the front driver and

passenger seats may be equipped with

heaters in both the seat cushions and

seatbacks. The controls for the front

heated seats are located on the center

instrument panel below the climate

controls.

The heated seats have three settings:

High, Medium, and Low. Push the

switch once to turn the heated seats on

High, twice for Medium, and three times

for Low. Pushing the switch a fourth

time will turn the heated seat off.

Note:

If the ignition is switched OFF while

the seat warmer is operating (High,

Mid or Low), and then switched ON

again, the seat warmer will

automatically operate at the

temperature set before switching the

ignition OFF.

Use the seat warmer when the

engine is running. Leaving the seat

warmer on for long periods with the

engine not running could discharge the

battery.

03010202-12A-003AB

Manual Seat Adjustment

1 — Adjustment Bar

2 — Height Dial

3 — Recline Lever

The temperature of the seat warmer

cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid

and Low.

Once a heat setting is selected,

heat will be felt within two to five

minutes.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to

the skin because of advanced age, chronic

illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,

medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or

other physical condition must exercise care

when using the seat heater. It may cause

burns even at low temperatures, especially

if used for long periods of time.

Do not place anything on the seat or

seatback that insulates against heat, such

as a blanket or cushion. This may cause

the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat

that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface

temperature of the seat.

Caution!

Do not use organic solvents to clean the

seat. It may damage the seat surface and

the heater.

NON-ADJUSTABLE

HEAD RESTRAINTS

The non-adjustable head restraints are

form fitted into the upper structure of

the seatback, and are designed to

reduce the risk of injury by restricting

head movement in the event of a rear

impact. The seatback should be

properly adjusted to an upright position

where the head restraint is positioned

as close as possible to the back of the

occupant’s head.

Warning!

Be certain that the seatback is locked

securely into position. Otherwise, the seat

will not provide the proper stability for

passengers. An improperly latched

seatback could cause serious injury.

03010203-L12-002

Heated Seat Switches

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Driver And Passenger

Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with

non-adjustable head restraints on the

driver's and passenger's seatbacks.

The non-adjustable head restraints

consist of a trimmed foam covering

over the upper structure of the

seatbacks and are intended to help

protect occupants from neck injury.

Adjust the seatbacks to their upright,

on-road positions so that the head

restraint is positioned as close as

possible to the back of the occupant’s

head.

Warning!

Be certain that the seatback is locked

securely into position. Otherwise, the seat

will not provide the proper stability for

passengers. An improperly latched

seatback could cause serious injury.

STEERING WHEEL

Steering Wheel

Adjustment

To change the angle of the steering

wheel:

1. With the gear selector in the PARK

position, pull the lock release lever,

located under the steering column,

downward.

2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired

position.

3. Push the lock release lever upward

to lock the steering column.

4. Attempt to push the steering wheel

upward and downward to ensure it is

locked before driving.

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering column while

driving. Adjusting the steering column while

driving or driving with the steering column

unlocked could cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering

column is locked before driving your

vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may

result in serious injury or death.

04050101-12A-001AB

Manual Tilt Adjustment

1 — Lock Release Lever

MIRRORS

Outside Mirrors

Be sure that all inside and outside

mirrors are adjusted to the desired

position prior to driving the vehicle.

Mirror Types:

Flat Type (Driver Side): flat surface

mirror.

Convex Type (Passenger Side): this

mirror has a slight curve.

Note: The passenger side convex

outside mirror will give a much wider

view toward the rear of the vehicle, and

especially of the adjacent lane.

The outside mirrors may be equipped

with a heated mirror system. Refer to

“Climate Controls” for more information.

The perceived distance of objects in the

outer and inner regions of the wide

angle mirror is different.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the

passenger side convex mirror will look

smaller and farther away than they really

are. Relying too much on your passenger

side mirror could cause you to collide with

another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or

distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger

side mirror.

Inside Day / Night Mirror

Rear View Mirror Adjustment

Before driving, adjust the rear view

mirror to center on the view through the

rear window.

Note: Before adjusting the manual

mirror, place the mirror in the “day

driving position” (see below).

Reducing Glare From Headlights

1. Push the lever forward for day

driving (A position).

2. Pull the lever rearward to reduce

glare of headlights from vehicles at the

rear (B position).

04060102-ADJ-001

Manual Mirror Adjustment

04060102-MAN-002AB

Mirror Adjustment Lever

1 — Mirror Adjustment Lever

A — Day Driving Position

B — Reduced Glare Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Dimming

Mirror — If Equipped

The automatic dimming mirror

automatically reduces glare of

headlights from vehicles at the rear

when the ignition is switched ON.

Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the

automatic dimming function. The

indicator light will turn off.

Caution!

To avoid damage to the mirror during

cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution

directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution

onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror

clean.

Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the

automatic dimming function. The

indicator light will turn off.

To reactivate the automatic dimming

function, push the on button ( I ). The

indicator light will illuminate.

Note:

Do not use glass cleaner or

suspend objects on or around the light

sensor. Otherwise, light sensor

sensitivity will be affected and may not

operate normally.

The automatic dimming function is

canceled when the ignition is switched

ON and the gear selector is in

REVERSE.

Power Mirrors

The ignition must be in the ACC or ON

position to adjust the outside power

mirrors.

Rotate the mirror switch to the left(L)

orright(R)toselect which mirror to

adjust.

Push the mirror control switch in the

direction of the desired position.

After adjusting the mirror, lock the

control by rotating the switch to the

center position to prevent accidental

movements.

04060102-36E-666

Automatic Dimming Mirror Buttons

1—Off

2—On

3 — Light Sensor

04060102-121-666

Light/Rain Sensor

2 — Light Sensor

04060101-L12-001

Power Mirror Switch

0 — Center Position

1 — Left Position

2 — Right Position

Folding Mirrors

Manually fold the outside mirror

rearward until it is flush with the vehicle.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

driver side automatic-dimming mirror.

The automatic-dimming door mirror is

linked with the automatic-dimming

rearview mirror inside the vehicle to

automatically reduce headlight glare

from vehicles at the rear. Refer to

“Automatic Dimming Mirror” in this

section for further information.

Note: The passenger door mirror does

not have the automatic-dimming

feature.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlights

Rotate the headlight switch to

activate/deactivate the headlights, other

exterior lights and dashboard

illumination.

When the lights are turned on, the

indicator in the instrument cluster

illuminates.

Note: To prevent discharge of the

battery, do not leave the lights on while

the engine is OFF.

04060101-12R-001AB

Outside Folding Mirror

05030101-132-001AB

Headlight Switch

1 — Headlight Switch

2 — Fog Light Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Headlight Operation

Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF Daytime Running Lights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF

Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off

Daytime

Running Lights On Off Off Off Off Off

Tail Lights / Position Lights /

License Plate Lights /

Instrument Panel Illumination

Off Off On On On

(*)

(*) If the driver's door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

With Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF AUTO

Daytime Running

Lights

High Beams

Ignition Position ON

ACC Or

OFF

ACC Or

OFF

ACC Or

OFF

ACC Or

OFF

Headlights Off Off

Auto

(*)

Off Off Off On Off

Daytime Running Lights On Off

Auto

(*)

Off Off Off Off Off

Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate

Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination

Off Off Auto

(**) /

Off

(***)

On On On

(****)

(*) The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor.

(**) While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is switched to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have

elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

(***) When the ignition is switched to a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is switched to AUTO.

(****) If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights tur n off.

Daytime Running Lights

(DRL)

The daytime running lights turn on

automatically when the vehicle starts

moving.

They turn off when the parking brake is

engaged or the gear selector is shifted

to the PARK position (if equipped with

automatic transmission).

Note: In some markets, the daytime

running lights can be deactivated. Refer

to “Personalization Features” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

High Beams

The headlights can be switched

between high and low beams by

pushing the headlight switch lever

forward for high beams, and pulling the

lever rearward to return to low beams.

When the headlight high beams are on,

the

high beam indicator is

illuminated in the instrument cluster.

Flash To Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your

headlights by partially pulling the

headlight lever toward the steering

wheel. This will cause the high beam

headlights to turn on until the lever is

released.

The

high beam indicator in the

instrument cluster illuminates while the

high beams are active.

Automatic Lighting

When the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position and the ignition is

switched ON, the light sensor will

detect the surrounding light levels and

automatically turns the headlights, other

exterior lights and dashboard

illumination on or off.

Note: Do not shade the light sensor by

placing a sticker or a label on the

windshield. Otherwise the light sensor

will not operate correctly.

The light sensor also works as a rain

sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep

hands and scrapers clear of the

windshield when the wiper lever is in

the AUTO position and the ignition is

switched ON, as fingers could be

pinched or the wipers and wiper blades

damaged when the wipers activate

automatically. If you are going to clean

the windshield, be sure the wipers are

turned off completely when the engine

is running.

Note:

The headlights, other exterior lights

and dashboard lights may not turn off

immediately even if the surrounding

area becomes well-lit because the light

sensor determines that it is night time if

the surrounding area is continuously

dark for several minutes such as inside

long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels,

or in indoor parking lots. In this case,

the lights turn off if the light switch is

turned to the OFF position.

When the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position and the ignition is

switched to ACC or OFF, the

headlights, other exterior lights and

dashboard illumination will turn off.

The dashboard lights can be

adjusted by rotating the knob in the

instrument cluster. The day/night mode

can be changed by rotating the knob

until a beep sound is heard.

The sensitivity of the automatic

lightsmaybechangedbyan

authorized dealer.

05030101-12A-003

Light Sensor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Follow Me Home

The Follow Me Home Light System

turns on the headlights (low beams) for

a period of time after the ignition is

switched OFF.

System Activation

With the ignition switched to ACC or

OFF, pull the headlight control lever

rearward and the low beam headlights

will turn on.

The headlights turn off after a period of

time after all doors are closed.

The time until the headlights turn off

after all of the doors are closed can be

changed through the Connect system.

The headlights turn off if the lever is

pulled again while the headlights are on,

or after three minutes of no further

action after the first pull of the lever.

Front Fog Lights

The front fog light can be activated

when the ignition is in the ON position

and the headlights or parking lights are

on.

Activation

Turn the headlight switch to the

position.

Rotate the fog light switch to the

position.

The

fog light indicator in the

instrument cluster illuminates while the

front fog lights are on.

Deactivation

Perform one of the following operations

to turn off the front fog lights:

Rotate the fog light switch to the OFF

position.

Turn the headlight switch to the OFF

position.

Switch the ignition to a position other

than ON.

The

fog light indicator in the

instrument cluster goes off when the

front fog light is turned off.

With Auto-Light Control

When the fog light switch is in

position and the headlight switch is

in AUTO position, the front fog lights will

stay on.

Turn Signals

The ignition must be in the ON position

to use the turn signals and lane change

assist.

Move the signal lever down (for a left

turn) or up (for a right turn). The signal

will self-cancel after the turn is

completed.

If the indicator light continues to flash

after a turn, manually return the lever to

its original position.

The turn signal indicators (green)

in the instrument cluster flash

according to the operation of the turn

signal lever to show which signal is

active.

Note: If an indicator light stays on

without flashing or if it flashes

abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs

may be burned out.

05030101-132-001AB

Headlight Switch

1 — Headlight Switch

2 — Fog Light Switch

Lane Change Assist

Move the lever halfway toward the

direction of the lane change (until the

indicator flashes) and hold it there. It will

return to the off position when released.

Three-Flash Turn Signal

After releasing the turn signal lever, the

turn signal indicator flashes three times.

The operation can be cancelled by

moving the lever in the direction

opposite to which it was operated.

The three-flash turn signal function can

be turned on or off using the

personalization function in the radio.

Adaptive Front Lighting

System (AFS) — If

Equipped

This system directs the main headlight

beams and adapts it to the driving

conditions around bends and turns,

continuously and automatically.

The system directs the headlight beam

to illuminate the road in the best way,

taking into account the speed of the

vehicle, the bend or corner angle and

the speed of steering.

The Adaptive Front Lighting System is

automatically activated when the

vehicle is started.

Leaving Home Light

System

The Leaving Home Light System turns

the headlights on when the unlock

button on the key fob is pushed while

away from the vehicle.

Activation

With the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and the headlight switch is in

the

or position, the

headlights will illuminate when the

unlock button on the key fob is pushed,

and the vehicle receives the signal.

The headlights turn off after

30 seconds.

The following lights turn on when the

Leaving Home Light System is

operated: low beams/parking lights/tail

lights/license plate lights.

Operation of the Leaving Home Light

System can be turned on or off through

the Connect system.

When the lock button on the key fob

is pushed, and the vehicle receives the

signal, the headlights turn off.

When the headlight switch is in a

position other than

or ,the

headlights turn off.

Headlamp Leveling

System — If Equipped

On some models, the angle of the

headlights will be automatically adjusted

when turning on the headlights.

Adjusting The Headlight

When Abroad

Dipped headlights are adjusted for

driving in the country where the vehicle

was originally purchased.

When travelling in countries with

opposite driving direction, to avoid

flashing the drivers on the other side of

the road, you need to cover areas of

the headlight. For this operation contact

an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD

WIPERS / WASHER

Windshield Wipers And

Washer

The windshield wiper/washer lever is

located on the right side of the steering

wheel. The ignition must be in the ON

position to use these features.

Windshield Wipers

Activate the windshield wipers by

pushing the wiper lever up or down.

With Intermittent Wiper

Set the lever to the intermittent position

and choose the interval timing by

rotating the center switch.

Switch positions:

or MIST: operation while

pushing the lever upward

OFF: stop

--- or INT: intermittent operation

— or LO: low speed operation

= or HI: high speed operation

With Auto-Wiper Control

When the wiper lever is in the AUTO

position, the rain sensor will sense the

amount of rainfall on the windshield and

turns the wipers on or off automatically

(off/intermittent/low speed/high speed).

Switch positions:

or MIST: operation while

pulling up lever

OFF: stop

AUTO: auto control operation

— or LO: low speed operation

= or HI: high speed operation

Adjusting Rain Sensor Sensitivity

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be

adjusted by rotating the switch on the

wiper lever.

From the center position (normal),

rotate the switch downward for higher

sensitivity (+) (faster response) or rotate

it upward for less sensitivity (-) (slower

response).

Note: Do not shade the rain sensor by

placing a sticker or a label on the

windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor

will not operate correctly.

When the wiper lever is in the AUTO

position and the ignition is switched

ON, the wipers may move automatically

in the following cases:

If the windshield above the rain

sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth.

If the windshield is struck with a hand

or other object from either outside or

inside the vehicle.

Warning!

Keep hands and scrapers clear of the

windshield when the wiper lever is in the

AUTO position and the ignition is switched

ON as fingers could be pinched or the

wipers and wiper blades damaged when

the wipers activate automatically.

If you are going to clean the windshield,

be sure the wipers are turned off. This is

important when clearing ice and snow.

Switching the auto-wiper lever from the

OFF to the AUTO position while driving

activates the windshield wipers once,

after which they operate according to

the rainfall amount.

The auto-wiper control may not operate

when the rain sensor temperature is

about 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, or about

185 °F (85 °C) or higher.

05030101-122-001

Windshield Wiper Lever

1 — Rain Sensor Adjustment

If the windshield is coated with water

repellent, the rain sensor may not be

able to sense the amount of rainfall

correctly and auto-wiper control may

not operate properly.

If dirt or debris (such as ice or debris

containing salt water) adheres to the

windshield above the rain sensor or if

the windshield is iced, it could cause

the wipers to move automatically.

However, if the wipers cannot remove

this ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wiper

control will stop operation. In this case,

set the wiper lever to the low speed

position or high speed position for

manual operation, or remove the ice,

dirt or debris by hand to restore the

auto-wiper operation.

If the auto-wiper lever is left in the

AUTO position, the wipers could

operate automatically from the effect of

strong light sources, electromagnetic

waves, or infrared light because the rain

sensor uses an optical sensor.

It is recommended that the auto-wiper

lever be switched to the OFF position

other than when driving the vehicle

under rainy conditions.

The auto-wiper control functions can be

turned off.

Because heavy ice and snow can jam

the wiper blades, the wiper motor is

protected from motor breakdown,

overheating and possible fire by a circuit

breaker. This mechanism will

automatically stop operation of the

blades, but only for about five minutes. If

this happens, turn off the wiper switch

and park off the road and remove the

snow and ice. After five minutes, turn on

the switch and the blades should operate

normally. If they do not resume

functioning, contact an authorized dealer

as soon as possible. Pull off to the side

of the road to a safe location. Wait until

the weather clears before trying to drive

with the wipers inoperative.

Windshield Washer

Pull the wiper/washer lever rearward

and hold it to spray washer fluid onto

the windshield.

With the wiper lever in the OFF,

intermittent, or AUTO position, the

wipers will operate continuously until

the lever is released.

Warning!

Sudden loss of visibility through the

windshield could lead to a collision. You

might not see other vehicles or other

obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the

windshield during freezing weather, warm

the windshield with defroster before and

during windshield washer use.

If the fluid level is normal and the

washer does not work, contact an

authorized dealer.

With Headlight Washers

When the headlights are on, the

headlight washers operate

automatically once every fifth time the

windshield washer operates.

04110109-115-001AB

Windshield Washer Nozzles

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CLIMATE CONTROL

SYSTEM

Operating Tips

The air conditioning system will only

operate with the engine running.

To prevent the battery from being

discharged while the engine is off, do

not leave the Blower Control Knob on

for extended periods of time.

To improve system efficiency, clear all

obstructions (leaves, snow and ice)

from the hood and the air inlet in the

grille.

Use the air conditioning system to

defog the windows and dehumidify the

air.

Recirculation mode should be used

when driving through tunnels, while in a

traffic jam, or when you would like to

quickly cool the interior.

Use the outside air position for

ventilation or windshield defrosting.

If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows to let warm air escape, and

then run the air conditioning system.

To keep the internal parts lubricated

and the system running smoothly, run

the air conditioner about 10 minutes at

least once a month.

Have the air conditioner checked before

the weather gets hot. A lack of refrigerant

may make the air conditioner less

efficient. The refrigerant specifications are

indicated on a label (A or B depending

on the market) attached to the inside of

the engine compartment. Check the label

before refilling the refrigerant. If the wrong

type of refrigerant is used, it could result

in a serious malfunction of the air

conditioner. For details, contact your

authorized dealer.

Caution!

The system uses a coolant that is compatible

with the laws in force in the countries where

the vehicle is sold, R134a or R1234yf

(indicated on a specific plate in the engine

compartment). The use of other coolants

affects the efficiency and condition of the

system. Also the compressor coolants used

must be compatible with the indicated

coolant.

06010100121001

Label Location

Vent Operation

Adjusting The Vents

To adjust the direction of air flow, move

the vent adjustment knob.

Note: When using the air conditioner in

humid conditions, fog may blow from

the vents. This is a result of humid air

being suddenly cooled and does not

indicate a system malfunction.

Center Vents (Driver) and Side

Vents

Center and side vents are located on

the dashboard.

Air vent open/close: the air vents can

be fully opened and closed by using

knob1(A=open/B=close).

Air flow direction adjustment:use

knob 1 to adjust the center vents to the

desired position.

Center Vents (Front Passenger)

Center vents are located on the

dashboard.

Air vent open/close: use the Center

Vent tab 1 to open/close the center

vents(A=open/B=close).

Air flow direction adjustment: use the

Center Vent tab 1 to adjust the center

vents to the desired position.

06010201-033-001

Side Air Vents

06010201-033-666

Operating the Side Air Vents

1 — Air Vent Knob

A — Open Position

B — Closed Position

06010201-121-001AB

Central Air Vent

06010201-121-777AB

Operating The Central Air Vent

1 — Center Vent Tab

A — Open Position

B — Closed Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Airflow Mode

06010202-121-002

Airflow Locations

1 — Fixed Upper Air Diffuser

2 — Adjustable Side Air Vents

3 — Adjustable Center Air Vent

4 — Floor Vents

Manual Climate Control System

With MAX A/C function

06010300-122-002

Manual Climate Controls With MAX A/C

1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button

2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button

3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Controls

1 – Temperature Control Knob

This dial controls the interior temperature

of the vehicle.

Turn it clockwise for hotter temperatures

and counterclockwise for colder

temperatures.

MAX A/C – If Equipped:

When the

Mode Selector Knob is set to

or ,

the Blower Control Knob is in a position

other than 0, and the temperature

control knob is in the maximum cold

position, the Recirculation Button will

activate and the A/C will turn on

automatically. If A/C is not desired,

press the A/C Button to turn it off.

2 – Blower Control Knob

The blower has seven speeds. Turn the

knob clockwise to increase blower speed

or counterclockwise to decrease blower

speed.

3 – Mode Selector Knob

Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select

the air flow mode.

The mode selector dial can be set at the

intermediate positions (●) between each

mode.

Set the knob to an intermediate position

if you want to split the air flow between

the two modes.

For example, when the Mode Selector

Knob is at the intermediate position (●)

between the

and positions, air

flow from the floor vents is less than

that of the

position.

4 – Rear Window Defrost Button

The Rear Window Defrost Button clears

fog and frost from the rear window. The

ignition must be on to use the defroster.

Push the button to turn on the Rear

Window Defroster. The Rear Window

Defroster operates for about

15 minutes and then turns off

automatically. The button LED will

illuminate when the defroster is

operating.

To turn off the Rear Window Defroster

before the end of 15 minutes, push the

button again.

Caution!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause

damage to the heating elements:

Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the

window. Use a soft cloth and a mild

washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off

after soaking with warm water.

Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,

or abrasive window cleaners on the interior

surface of the window.

Keep all objects a safe distance from the

window.

Note:

Before opening the convertible top,

make sure the Rear Window Defrost

Button is turned off. Otherwise, the

heat generated from the defroster

could damage the convertible top and

the internal material.

This defroster is not designed for

melting snow. If there is an

accumulation of snow on the rear

window, remove it before using the

defroster.

Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:

To turn on the mirror defroster, turn the

ignition ON and push the Rear Window

Defroster Button.

5 – Air Recirculation Button

Push the Air Recirculation Button to

select between outside air and

recirculated air positions.

Recirculated Air Position: (LED on)

Outside air is shut off when this position

has been activated. Use this position

when going through tunnels, driving in

congested traffic (high engine exhaust

areas), or when quick cooling of the

vehicle is desired.

Outside Air Position: (LED off)

Outside air is allowed to enter the

cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or

windshield defrosting.

Note: Do not use the Outside Air

Position in cold or rainy weather is

dangerous as it will cause the windows

to fog up. Your vision will be hampered,

which could lead to a serious accident.

6 – A/C Button

Push the A/C Button to turn on the air

conditioner.

The LED on the switch will illuminate

when the Blower Control Knob is in any

position except the OFF position.

Push the button again to turn off the air

conditioner.

Note: The air conditioner may not

function when the outside temperature

approaches 32 °F (0 °C).

Heating

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the

position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to

the outside air position.

3. Set the Temperature Control Dial to

the hot position.

4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn on the air conditioner.

If the windshield fogs up easily, set the

Mode Selector Knob to the

position.

If cooler air is desired at face level, set

the Mode Selector Knob to the

position and adjust the Temperature

Control Knob to maintain comfort.

The floor vents will blow warmer air

while the side air vents will blow cooler

air (except when the temperature

control dial is set at the maximum hot

or cold position).

Cooling (With Air

Conditioner)

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the

position.

2. Set the Temperature Control Knob

to the cold position.

3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the

desired speed.

4. Turn on the air conditioner by

pushing the A/C Button.

5. After cooling begins, adjust the

Blower Control Knob and Temperature

Control Knob as needed to maintain

comfort.

Note:

If the air conditioner is used while

driving up large hills or in heavy traffic,

monitor the Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning Light to see if it

is illuminated or flashing. The air

conditioner may cause engine

overheating in these situations. If the

warning light is illuminated or flashing,

turn the air conditioning off

immediately.

When maximum cooling is desired,

set the Temperature Control Knob to

the extreme cold position, push the Air

Recirculation Button to activate the

recirculated air position, and then turn

the fan control dial fully clockwise.

If warmer air is desired at floor level,

set the Mode Selector Knob to the

position, and adjust the

Temperature Control Knob to maintain

comfort.

The floor vents will blow warmer air

while the side air vents will blow cooler

air (except when the temperature

control dial is set at the maximum hot

or cold position).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Ventilation

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the

position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to

the outside air position.

3. Set the Temperature Control Knob

to the desired position.

4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the

desired speed.

Windshield Defrosting

And Defogging

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the

Front Defrost

position.

2. Set the Temperature Control Knob to

the desired position.

3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the

desired speed.

4. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn on the air conditioner.

Warning!

Set the temperature control to the hot or

warm position when defogging (Front

Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost

position with the temperature control set to

the cold position is dangerous as it will

cause the outside of the windshield to fog

up. Your vision will be hampered, which

could lead to a serious accident.

Note:

For maximum defrosting, turn on

the air conditioner, set the Temperature

Control Knob to the extreme hot

position, and turn the Blower Control

Knob fully clockwise.

If warm air is desired from the floor

vents, set the Mode Selector Knob to

the

position.

If equipped with MAX A/C, the

Recirculation Button can be set to the

Recirculated Air position, when the

Blower Control Knob is ON, and the

Mode Selector Knob is set to the Front

Defrost position.

Dehumidifying (With Air

Conditioner)

Operate the air conditioner in cool or

cold weather to help defog the

windshield and side windows.

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the

desired position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Knob to the

outside air position.

3. Set the Temperature Control Knob

to the desired position.

4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the

desired speed.

5. Turn on the air conditioner by

pressing the A/C Button.

Note: One of the functions of the air

conditioner is dehumidifying the air. To

use this function, the temperature does

not have to be set to cold. Set the

Temperature Control Knob to the

desired position (hot or cold), and turn

on the air conditioner to dehumidify the

cabin air.

Automatic Climate Control System

06010900-122-999

Automatic Climate Controls — Type A

1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button

2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button

3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

06010900122

Automatic Climate Controls — Type B

1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button

2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button

3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

Controls

1 – Temperature Control Knob

This knob controls internal temperature

of the vehicle. Turn it clockwise for

hotter temperatures and

counterclockwise for colder

temperatures.

2 – Blower Control Knob

The fan has seven speeds. Turn the

clockwise to increase blower speed or

counterclockwise to decrease blower

speed/enter Auto mode.

AUTO Position: The blower speed is

automatically controlled by the system

based upon the set temperature.

0 Position: To turn off the system, set

the dial to 0 position.

3 – Mode Selector Knob

Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select

the air flow mode.

AUTO Position: The air flow

automatically adjusts based upon the

selected temperature.

Note:

With the air flow mode set to the

position, and the Temperature

Control Knob is set to a medium

temperature, the floor vents will blow

warmer air, and the center and side air

vents will blow cooler air.

When the Blower Control Knob is

on, and the Mode Selector Knob is in

the

position, the air conditioner is

automatically turned on, and the Air

Recirculation Button is automatically

set to the outside air position for

windshield defrosting.

4 – Rear Window Defrost Button

The Rear Window Defroster clears fog

and frost from the rear window. The

ignition must be switched ON to use

the defroster.

Push the button to turn on the Rear

Window Defroster.

The Rear Window Defroster operates

for about 15 minutes, and then turns off

automatically.

The button LED will illuminate when the

defroster is operating.

To turn off the Rear Window Defroster

before the end of 15 minutes, push the

switch again.

Caution!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause

damage to the heating elements:

Before opening the convertible top,

make sure the Rear Window Defrost Button

is turned OFF. Otherwise, the heat

generated from the defroster could

damage the convertible top and the internal

material.

Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the

window. Use a soft cloth and a mild

washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off

after soaking with warm water.

Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,

or abrasive window cleaners on the interior

surface of the window.

Keep all objects a safe distance from the

window.

Note: This defroster is not designed for

melting snow. If there is an

accumulation of snow on the rear

window, remove it before using the

defroster.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To

turn on the mirror defroster, switch the

ignition on and push the Rear Window

Defroster Button.

5 – Air Recirculation Button

Press the Air Recirculation Button to

select between outside air and

recirculated air positions.

Recirculated Air Position: (LED On)

Outside air is shut off when this position

has been activated. Use this position

when going through tunnels, driving in

congested traffic (high engine exhaust

areas), or when quick cooling of the

vehicle is desired.

Outside Air Position: (LED Off)

Outside air is allowed to enter the

cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or

windshield defrosting.

Note: Do not use the Recirculated Air

Position in cold or rainy weather. Using

the Recirculated Air Position in cold or

rainy weather is dangerous as it will

cause the windows to fog up. Your

vision will be hampered, which could

lead to a serious accident.

6 – A/C Button

Push the A/C Button to turn on the air

conditioner.

The LED on the switch will illuminate

when the Blower Control Knob is in any

position except the off position.

Push the button again to turn off the air

conditioner.

Note: The air conditioner may not

function when the outside temperature

approaches 32 °F(0°C).

Operation Of Automatic

Air Conditioning

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the mode selector knob to the

AUTO position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to

the outside air position (indicator light

turned off).

Note: If the recirculated air position is

used for long periods in cold weather or

high humidity, the windshield may fog

up more easily.

3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the

AUTO position.

4. Push the A/C button to operate the

air conditioning (indicator light on).

5. Set the Temperature Control Knob

to the desired position.

6. To tur n off the system, set the

blower control knob to the 0 position.

Setting the temperature to maximum

hot or cold will not provide the desired

temperature at a faster rate.

When selecting heat, the system will

restrict air flow until it has warmed to

prevent cold air from blowing out of the

vents.

For an optimal cabin temperature, set

the temperature close to 77º. Adjust to

the desired temperature if necessary.

Windshield Defrosting

And Defogging

Set the mode selector knob to the

position and turn the blower control

knob to the desired speed.

In this position, the outside air position

is automatically selected, and when the

blower control knob is on, the air

conditioner automatically turns on. The

air conditioner will directly dehumidify

the air to the front windshield and side

windows. Air flow amount will be

increased.

Use the temperature control knob to

increase the air flow temperature and

defog the windshield more quickly.

Warning!

Set the temperature control to the hot or

warm position when defogging (Front

Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost

position with the temperature control set to

the cold position is dangerous as it will

cause the outside of the windshield to fog

up. Your vision will be hampered, which

could lead to a serious accident.

Sunlight/Temperature

Sensor

The air conditioning system measures

inside and outside temperatures, and

sunlight.

It then sets temperatures inside the

cabin accordingly.

Note: Do not obstruct either sensor.

Otherwise, the air-conditioning system

will not operate properly.

POWER WINDOWS

Power Window Controls

The ignition must be placed in the ON

position for the power windows to

operate.

A power window may no longer

open/close if you continue to push the

switch after opening/closing the power

window.

If the power window does not

open/close, wait a moment and then

operate the switch again.

Note: To prevent burning out the fuse

and damaging the power window

system, do not open or close both

windows at once.

The passenger window can be

operated with each door switch when

the power window lock switch on the

driver's door is in the unlocked position.

06010904333003

Exterior Sensor

1 — Sunlight Sensor

06010904-121-002AB

Interior Sensor

2 — Interior Temperature Sensor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Passenger Control Switches

The passenger window can also be

operated using the master control

switches on the driver's door.

Auto-Opening Power Windows

To fully open the window automatically

push the switch completely down. To

stop the window partway pull or push

the switch in the opposite direction and

then release it. The power window

cannot be fully closed while the door is

open.

Power Window System Initialization

Procedure

If the battery was disconnected during

vehicle maintenance, or for other

reasons (such as a switch continues to

be operated after the window is

open/closed), the window will not fully

open automatically.

Resetting of the automatic function can

be performed using the master control

switches or each passenger door

switch.

The power window auto function reset

procedure can be done on both door

switches. The power window auto

function will only resume on the power

window that has been reset:

1. Close the doors and the convertible

top.

2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

3. Make sure that the power window

lock switch located on the driver's door

is not depressed.

4. Push the switch and fully open the

window.

5. Pull up the switch to fully close the

window and continue holding the

switch for about two seconds after the

window fully closed.

6. Repeat steps four and five for the

passenger power window while seated

in the passenger seat.

7. Make sure that the power windows

operate correctly using the door

switches.

After the system has been re-initialized,

passenger window can be fully opened

automatically using the master control

switches. If the automatic power

window operation does not operate

normally while the doors or convertible

top are opened/closed, reset it using

the above procedures.

Engine-Off Power Window

Operation

The power window can be operated for

about 40 seconds after the ignition has

been cycled from ON to the OFF

position with both doors closed. If any

door is opened, the power window will

stop operating.

For engine-off operation of the power

window, the switch must be held up

firmly throughout window closure

because the auto-closing function will

be inoperable.

04070103-LN2-002

Power Window Switches

1 — Driver's Window

2 — Passenger's Window

04070103-L12-001

Power Window Switch Function

1 — Closing-Lightly Pull The Switch Up

2 — Opening-Lightly Hold The Switch

Down

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle, and do not let children play with

power windows. Do not leave the key fob

in or near the vehicle, or in a location

accessible to children, and do not leave the

ignition of a vehicle equipped with the

Keyless Entry System in the ACC or

ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become

entrapped by the windows while operating

the power window switches. Such

entrapment may result in serious injury or

death.

Power Window Lock

Switch

This feature prevents the passengers

power window from operating. Keep

this switch in the locked position while

children are in the vehicle.

1. Locked Position (Button

Pushed): only the driver's power

window can be operated.

2. Unlocked Position (Button Not

Pushed): both power windows on

each door can be operated.

Note: When the power window lock

switch is in the locked position, the light

on the passenger power window switch

turns off. The light may be difficult to

see depending on the surrounding

brightness.

HOMELINK —

IF EQUIPPED

General Information

The HomeLink system replaces up to

three hand-held transmitters with a

single built-in component in the

auto-dimming mirror. Pushing the

HomeLink button on the auto-dimming

mirror activates garage doors, gates

and other devices surrounding your

home.

Note: HomeLink and HomeLink house

icon are registered trademarks of

Gentex Corporation.

Warning!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon

monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run

your vehicle in the garage while

programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas

can cause serious injury or death.

Your motorized door or gate will open

and close while you are programming the

universal transceiver. Do not program the

transceiver if people, pets or other objects

are in the path of the door or gate. Only

use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse”

feature as required by Federal safety

standards. This includes most garage door

04070104-L12-001

Power Window Lockout Switch

1 — Locked Position

2 — Unlocked Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

opener models manufactured after 1982.

Do not use a garage door opener without

these safety features. Call toll-free

1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for safety information or

assistance.

Pre-Programming The

System

Note: It is recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being

programmed to HomeLink for quicker

training and accurate transmission of

the radio-frequency signal.

Proceed as follows:

1. Verify that there is a remote control

transmitter available for the device you

would like to program.

2. Disconnect the power to the device.

Programming The

System

Note: When programming a garage

door opener or a gate, disconnect the

power to these devices before

programming. Continuous operation of

the devices could damage the motor.

The HomeLink system provides three

buttons which can be individually

selected and programmed using the

transmitters for current, on-market

devices as follows:

1. Disconnect power to the device

being programmed.

2. Position the end of your handheld

transmitter one to three inches (2.5 -

7.5 cm) away from the HomeLink

button you wish to program while

keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both

the chosen HomeLink and hand-held

transmitter buttons. Do not release

the buttons until step four has been

completed.

4. After the HomeLink indicator light

changes from a slow to a rapidly

blinking light, release both the

HomeLink and hand-held transmitter

buttons.

5. Connect power to the device being

programmed.

6. Firmly press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button for five

seconds, and then release it. Perform

this operation two times to activate the

door or gate. If the door or gate does

not activate, press and hold the

just-trained HomeLink button and

observe the indicator light. If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and your

device should activate when the

HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

Note: To program the remaining two

HomeLink buttons, begin with step

one.

7. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a

constant light, continue with

“Programming” steps (see below) to

complete the programming of a rolling

code equipped device (most commonly

a garage door opener).

8. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate

the “learn” or “smart” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the

motorhead unit.

9. Press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button (the name and color of

the button may vary by manufacturer).

Note: Complete the programming

within 30 seconds.

04060102-121-999

HomeLink Buttons

1 — First HomeLink Button

2 — Second HomeLink Button

3 — Third HomeLink Button

10. Return to the vehicle and firmly

press, hold for two seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink

button. Repeat the “ press/hold/

release” sequence a second time, and,

depending on the brand of the garage

door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence

a third time to complete the

programming process. HomeLink

should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

Note: To program the remaining two

HomeLink buttons, begin with step

one.

For questions or comments, please

contact HomeLink at

www.homelink.com or

1-800-355-3515.

Gate Operator/Canadian

Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission -

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming.

Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.

gate operators are designed to

“time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator

by using the “Programming”

procedures (regardless of where you

live), replace “Programming The

System” step three with the following:

Note: If programming a garage door

opener or gate operator, it is advised to

unplug the device during the “cycling”

process to prevent possible

overheating.

1. Continue to press and hold the

HomeLink button while you press and

release - every two seconds (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter until the

frequency signal has successfully been

accepted by HomeLink (the indicator

light will flash slowly and then rapidly).

2. Proceed with the “Programming”

steps to complete.

Operating The System

Push the programmed HomeLink

button to operate a programmed

device.

The code will continue being

transmitted for a maximum of

20 seconds.

Reprogramming The

System

To program a device to HomeLink using

a HomeLink button previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button;

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink button, proceed with

“Programming The System” step one.

Erasing Programmed

HomeLink Buttons

To erase the existing programming from

all three operating channels, push and

hold the two outside buttons 1 and

3 on the auto-dimming mirror until the

HomeLink indicator light begins to flash

after approximately ten seconds.

Verify that the programming has been

erased when you resell the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

INTERNAL

EQUIPMENT

Storage Compartments

Center Console

The center console is located between

the driver’s and passenger’s seats.

Warning!

Keep storage compartments closed when

driving. Driving with the storage

compartments open is dangerous. To

reduce the possibility of injury in an

accident or a sudden stop, keep the

storage compartments closed when

driving.

Caution!

Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the

storage compartments while parked under

the sun. A lighter could explode or the

plastic material in eyeglasses could deform

and crack from high temperature.

Seat Side Compartment

The seat side compartment is located

between the seats above the

cupholders.

To open, push the release handle down

to open the seat side compartment.

Insert the emergency key in the lock

and turn it clockwise to lock, counter

clockwise to unlock.

Note:

When using the rear console cup

holders, remove any cups before opening

the seat side compartment. If the seat

side compartment is opened with a cup

present, the lid will hit the cups and may

cause the contents to spill.

Back Trim Storage Compartment

Small items can be stored in the back

trim storage compartment which is

located behind the seats.

06040706-12A-001AB

Center Console Lid

06040717-121-001AB

Seat Side Compartment

1 — Release Handle

2 — Key Hole

06040718-12A-002AB

Back Trim Storage Compartment

To use the back trim storage

compartment, slide the seat all the way

forward and fold the seat back forward,

then open the compartment.

When finished, close the compartment

and return the seat to its original

position and secure it.

After returning the seat to its original

position, make sure the seat is secured

by attempting to lightly move it forward

and rearward.

Caution!

Do not forcefully push objects into the rear

storage compartment. Otherwise, the box

could be damaged.

Sun Visors

The sun visors are located at the sides

of the interior rear view mirror. They can

be adjusted forward toward the

windshield, and sideways toward the

side windows, to block sunlight.

Vanity Mirrors

To access the vanity mirror, fold the sun

visor down and lift the cover toward the

seats.

Interior Lights

Overhead Light

The interior light is located in the

headliner in between the sun visors.

The interior light can be set to three

different positions.

Light switch positions:

On : Light is on at all times.

Door : Light is on when any door is

open. Light is on or off when the

illuminated entry system is on.

Off : Light is off at all times.

06040100-L12-001AB

Sun Visor

06040200-12A-002AB

Overhead Light Switch

1—On

2 — Door

3—Off

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Trunk Light

The trunk light comes on when the lid is

open and turns off when closed.

Note: To prevent the battery from

being discharged, do not leave the

trunk open for a long period when the

engine is not running.

Illuminated Entry System

The overhead light turns on when any

of the following operations occurs with

the overhead light switch in the door

position and the ignition switched OFF:

Turns on for about 30 seconds when

the driver's door is unlocked.

Turns on for about 15 seconds when

a door is opened while a key fob is left

in the vehicle and then the door is

closed.

Turns on for about five seconds

when a door is opened from the outside

with a key fob being carried and then

the door is closed.

The overhead light turns on for about

15 seconds when the ignition is

switched OFF with the overhead light

switch in the door position.

The overhead light turns off immediately

in the following cases:

The ignition is switched ON and both

doors are closed.

The driver's door is locked.

Battery Saver

If any door is left open with the

overhead light switch in the door

position or the trunk lid is left open, the

overhead light or trunk light turns off

after about 30 minutes to prevent

discharge of the battery.

To prevent discharge of the battery, if

the interior lights remain on (the interior

light switch is in the on position), they

will turn off automatically under the

following conditions:

No operations are done for about

30 minutes after the ignition is switched

OFF.

The button on the key fob is

pushed, or the request switch located

on the exterior door handle is pushed to

lock the doors (vehicles with the

advanced keyless function) after the

ignition is switched OFF.

In addition, if the following operations

are performed after turning the interior

lights off, they will turn on again if:

The ignition is switched to a position

other than OFF.

A door is opened.

A door is unlocked.

The operation of the illuminated entry

system can be changed through the

Connect system.

Accessory Socket

The accessory socket is located deep

in the back of the footwell on the

passenger side.

Only use genuine FCA accessories or

the equivalent requiring no greater than

12V (120 W, 10A).

The ignition must be placed in ACC or

ON.

06040200-T12-003

Trunk Light Location

1 — Trunk Light Switch

06040400-L12-002AB

Accessory Socket

To prevent accessory socket damage

or electrical failure, pay attention to the

following:

Do not use accessories that require

more than 12V (120 W, 10A).

Do not use accessories that are not

genuine FCA accessories or the

equivalent.

Close the cover when the accessory

socket is not in use to prevent foreign

objects and liquids from getting into the

accessory socket.

Correctly insert the plug into the

accessory socket.

Do not insert the cigarette lighter into

the accessory socket.

Noise may occur on the audio

playback depending on the device

connected to the accessory socket.

Depending on the device connected

to the accessory socket, the vehicle's

electrical system may be affected,

which could cause the warning light to

illuminate. Disconnect the connected

device and make sure that the problem

is resolved. If the problem is resolved,

disconnect the device from the socket

and switch the ignition off. If the

problem is not resolved, contact an

authorized dealer.

Note: To prevent discharging of the

battery, do not use the socket for long

periods with the engine off or idling.

Warning!

To avoid serious injury or death:

Only devices designed for use in this

type of outlet should be inserted into any

12 Volt outlet.

Do not touch with wet hands.

Close the lid when not in use and while

driving the vehicle.

If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause

an electric shock and failure.

Cupholders —

If Equipped

Cupholders are available and can be

inserted in the center console on the

passenger side and the rear area of the

center console.

Warning!

Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids

while the vehicle is moving. Using a cup

holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle

is moving is dangerous. If the contents

spill, you could be burned.

06040500L21002

Cupholders

1 — Front Cup Holder

2 — Rear Cup Holder (If Equipped)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Caution!

Do not place plastic bottles without

caps in the cup holders. Otherwise, the

contents may spill while the vehicle is being

driven.

Do not place excessive weight on the

cup holders such as by resting your hands

or elbows on them. Otherwise, the cup

holders could be damaged.

If a passenger is present, install the front

cup holder to the rear console. Otherwise,

a knee might hit it and cause the contents

to spill.

Removing Cup Holders

Use both hands when removing the

cup holder.

Installing Cupholders

When installing a cupholder, insert it

firmly into the installation hole and make

sure that it is secured in place.

The front cupholder can be removed

and installed to the rear console.

The rear cupholder is designed for use

on the rear console and cannot be

installed to the front side.

06040500-J12AEC1-001

Removing Cupholders

06040500-J12AEC2-001

Installing Cupholders

06040500-L25-002

Correct Cupholder Placement

06040500-L26-001

Incorrect Cupholder Placement

Windblocker

This windblocker reduces rear wind

coming into the cabin when driving with

the convertible top down.

TRUNK LID

Opening

Warning!

Before opening the trunk lid, remove any

snow and ice accumulation on it.

Otherwise, the trunk lid could close under

the weight of the snow and ice resulting in

injury.

Be careful when opening/closing the

trunk lid during strong winds. If a strong

gust blows against the trunk lid, it could

close suddenly resulting in injury.

Fully open the trunk lid and make sure

that it stays open. If the trunk lid is only

opened partially, it could slam shut by

vibration or wind gusts resulting in injury.

When loading or unloading luggage in

the trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise,

you could get burned by the heat of the

exhaust gas.

Using The Remote Release Button

— If Equipped

The remote release button function can

be disabled by locking the doors using

the key fob, emergency key, or a

request switch on the exterior door

handle to prevent an intruder in the

vehicle from opening the trunk lid.

To enable the remote release button

operation, unlock the doors by using

the key fob, emergency key, request

switch on the exterior door handle, or

place the ignition in the ON position.

Note: The remote release button

cannot be disabled by locking the

doors using the door-lock

switch/door-lock knob.

06041000-12A-003AB

Windblocker

04030201-R12-001

Interior Trunk Lid Release Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Using The Electric Trunk Lid

Opener

With the remote release button: a trunk

lid can also be opened while the key

fob is being carried.

Push the electric trunk lid button and

raise the trunk lid when the latch

releases.

Without the remote release button:

unlock the doors and trunk lid, then

push the electric trunk lid opener and

raise it when the latch releases.

With The Advanced Keyless Entry

Function

A locked trunk lid can also be opened

while the key fob is being carried. When

opening the trunk lid with the doors

locked, it may require a few seconds for

the trunk lid latch to release after the

electric trunk lid opener is pushed.

The trunk lid can be closed when the

doors are locked with the key fob left in

the vehicle. However, to prevent locking

the key fob in the vehicle, the trunk lid

can be opened by pushing the electric

trunk lid opener. If the trunk lid cannot

be opened despite doing this

procedure, push the electric trunk lid

opener to fully open the trunk lid after

pushing the trunk lid completely closed.

If the vehicle battery is discharged or

there is a malfunction in the electrical

system and the trunk lid cannot be

unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened

by performing the emergency

procedure.

When Trunk Lid Cannot

Be Opened

If the battery is discharged, the trunk lid

cannot be unlocked and opened. In this

case, the trunk can be unlocked by

taking care of the discharged battery

situation.

If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked even

if the discharged battery situation has

been resolved, the electrical system

may have a malfunction.

Proceed as follows:

1. Close the convertible top and

remove the windblocker.

2. Remove the fasteners on the right

side of the vehicle.

3. Partially peel back the cover on the

right side of the vehicle.

04030201-12A-001

Electric Trunk Release Button

08080100-125-002

Remove Windblocker

08080100-121-004

Remove Fasteners

4. Turn and loosen the cap screws until

the screws start to spin free.

Note: Do not pull the screw when

pulling the cap. Otherwise, the screw

may fall off and become lost.

Refer to “Trunk Emergency Release”

located in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Closing

1. Use both hands to push the trunk lid

down until the lock snaps shut. Do not

slam it.

2. Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure

it is secure.

TRUNK EMERGENCY

RELEASE

As a security measure, a trunk internal

emergency release lever is built into the

rear tail panel. In the event of an adult

or child being locked inside the trunk,

the trunk can be simply opened by

pulling down the lever and open the

trunk lid. After performing this

emergency measure, contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Trunk Safety Warning

Warning!

Do not allow children to have access to the

trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from

outside, or through the inside of the

vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when

your vehicle is unattended. Once in the

trunk, young children may not be able to

escape, even if they entered through the

rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children

can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

08080100-122-001

Cover Removal

08080100-123-004

Trunk Emergency Release

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HOOD

Opening The Hood

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. With the vehicle in PARK, pull the

release handle located to the left of the

steering wheel, below the instrument

panel.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle

and insert your hand into the hood

opening, then slide the latch lever to the

right, and lift up the hood.

3. Pull up the support rod from the clip,

and insert it into the support rod hole

indicated by the arrow to hold the hood

open.

Closing The Hood

To close the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Check under the hood area to make

certain all filler caps are in place and all

loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers,

etc.) have been removed.

2. Lift the hood with one hand, and

with the other hand grasp the padded

area on the support rod.

3. Secure the support rod into the rod

clip.

4. Verify that the support rod is

secured in the clip before closing the

hood.

5. Lower the hood slowly to a height of

about 8 inches (20 cm) above its closed

position and then let it drop.

07030201-L12-001

Releasing The Hood Latch

1 — Hood Release Handle

07030201-122-001AB

Sliding The Latch Lever To The

Right

2 — Latch Lever

07030201-130-888

Support Rod Location

3 — Support Rod

07030201-123-002

Inserting Support Rod Into Hole

4 — Support Rod Hole

Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before

driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully

latched, it could open when the vehicle is

in motion and block your vision. Failure to

follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

Caution!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam

the hood to close it. Lower hood to

approximately 8 inches (20 cm) and drop

the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully

closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle

unless hood is fully closed, with both

latches engaged.

CONVERTIBLE TOP

(SOFT TOP)

Lowering The

Convertible Top

Warning!

Do not sit on the folded convertible top,

otherwise the convertible top could be

damaged or you may fall off and be injured.

To lower the convertible top, Proceed

as follows:

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied and the engine is OFF.

2. Make sure there are no objects

which have been placed in the area

where the convertible top is to be

retracted.

3. Push forward on the release latch.

There is a red indicator showing that

the latch is open.

4. With the lock release latch pushed

forward (red indicator visible), pull the

top latch handle rearward to unlock it.

04110102-L36-006

Lock Release Latch

1 — Release Latch Closed

2 — Release Latch Open

04110102-L21-001

Pulling The Top Latch Handle

Rearward

3 — Latch Release Handle

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Remove the striker from the anchor.

Note: The power windows will go

down automatically when the

convertible top is opened. If the power

windows do not go down automatically,

fully open the windows using the power

window switch located on the doors.

6. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold

the convertible top along the front edge

and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle.

To lower the convertible top from inside

the vehicle, use the convertible top

handles.

7. Move the convertible top rearward

and while pushing the rear glass lightly

with your hand.

8. With the back end of the convertible

top pushed down, push the front end

until a latching sound is heard. Lightly

rock the retracted convertible top to

make sure it is securely locked.

Warning!

Always keep your hands and fingers

away from the fastening mechanisms when

moving the convertible top: it is dangerous

to place your hands or fingers near the

fastening mechanisms. Your hands or

fingers could be caught and injured by the

mechanism.

04110102-L22-002

Removing Striker From Anchor

4 — Striker

5 — Anchor

04110102-123-002AB

Convertible Top Handles

6 — Handles

04110102-126-001AB

Retracted Convertible Top

Sit in the seat with the seat belt correctly

fastened when the vehicle is moving:

standing in the vehicle, or sitting on the

convertible top storage area or center

console when the vehicle is moving is a

dangerous way to ride. During a sudden

maneuver or collision you could be

seriously injured or even killed.

Raising The Convertible

Top

To raise the convertible top, proceed as

follows:

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied and the engine is OFF.

2. Pull the unlock lever upward to

disengage the lock.

3. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold

the convertible top along the front edge

and pull it towards the vehicle front. To

raise the convertible top from inside the

vehicle, use the convertible top

handles.

4. While sitting in a seat, grasp the

convertible top handles, and push the

convertible top against the windshield.

Make sure the striker engages with the

anchor, move the top latch slowly, and

then push the top latch upward until a

latching sound is heard.

5. If the red indicator is visible on the

lock release button, the convertible top

is not locked. After locking the

convertible top, verify that the red

indicator is not visible.

04110103-121-004

Unlock Lever Location

1 — Unlock Lever

04110103-L23-002

Convertible Handle Location

2 — Convertible Top Handles

04110103-L24-003

Convertible Top Components

4 — Closing Release Latch

5 — Striker

6 — Anchor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Caution!

Driving with the convertible top not fully

locked could damage the convertible top.

Note:

Do not spray water directly near the

seam of the window and convertible

top when flushing away dirt on the soft

top with water. Otherwise, water may

enter the vehicle (refer to “Convertible

Top Maintenance” in “Servicing And

Maintenance”).

The convertible top may be

constricted if it is left retracted for a

long period. Therefore, if the top has

become constricted, it may be difficult

to hook the top latch striker to the

anchor.

Make sure the convertible top is

securely locked by pushing up on it. If

it still sounds loose (rattles) after being

locked by the top latch, contact an

authorized dealer.

Convertible Top

Precautions

Remove leaves or other debris that

may accumulate on and around the

convertible top. If leaves or other debris

block the drain filter, water may enter

the vehicle. Clean the drain filter at least

once a year.

Before lowering or raising the

convertible top, stop in a safe place off

of the road and park on a level surface.

When lowering the convertible top,

make sure objects inside the vehicle are

not blown away by the wind.

Secure all loose objects inside before

driving with the convertible top down.

To help prevent theft or vandalism

and to ensure that the passenger

compartment stays dry, close the

convertible top securely and lock both

doors when leaving the vehicle.

The soft top is made of high quality

material and if it is not maintained

correctly, the material could harden,

becomes stained, or have an uneven

gloss.

Lowering the convertible top while

it's wet can also cause water to drip

into the cabin.

The power windows go down

automatically in conjunction with the

convertible top opening/closing.

However, this is a function for improving

the operability, and it does not mean

there is a problem. If the vehicle battery

is disconnected for vehicle maintenance

or other reasons, the power windows

will not go down automatically. If the

power windows do not go down, the

automatic open/close mechanism for

the windows must be reset.

The windblocker reduces the amount

of wind coming into the cabin from

behind when driving with the

convertible top opened.

Before starting the vehicle make sure

the convertible top is correctly locked.

04110103-124-001

Lock Release Button

6 — Red Indicator

7 — Release Latch Locked

8 — Release Latch Unlocked

Caution!

Before opening the convertible top,

make sure the rear window defroster

switch is turned off. Otherwise the heat

generated from the window defroster could

damage the convertible top and the internal

material.

Make sure nothing is on the convertible

top or near the back window when raising

or lowering the convertible top. Even small

objects may interfere and cause damage.

Do not drive through an automatic car

wash; it may damage the convertible top.

Do not raise or lower the convertible top

when the temperature is below 41 °F (5

°C); this will damage the convertible top

material.

Do not lower the convertible top when

it's wet. If the convertible top dries while

folded, it will deteriorate and mold.

Do not raise or lower the convertible top

in a strong wind as it could damage the

convertible top or cause an unexpected

accident.

ELECTRIC POWER

STEERING

Power Steering

Electric power steering is only operable

when the engine is running.

If the engine is off or if the power

steering system is inoperable, you can

still steer, but it requires more physical

effort.

If the steering feels stiffer than usual

during normal driving or the steering

vibrates, contact your authorized dealer.

The

warning light notifies the driver

of system abnormalities and operation

conditions.

Note: Never hold the steering wheel to

the extreme left or right for more than

five seconds with the engine running.

This could damage the power steering

system.

ENVIRONMENT

PROTECTION

SYSTEMS

Emission Control System

This vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system (the catalytic

converter is part of this system) that

enables the vehicle to comply with

existing exhaust emissions

requirements.

Ignoring the following precautions could

cause lead to accumulate on the

catalyst inside the converter or cause

the converter to get very hot. Either

condition will damage the converter and

cause poor performance:

USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.

Do not drive your vehicle with any

sign of engine malfunction.

Do not coast with the ignition OFF.

Do not descend steep grades in gear

with the ignition OFF.

Do not operate the engine at high

idle for more than two minutes.

Do not tamper with the emission

control system. All inspections and

adjustments must be made by your

authorized dealer.

Do not push-start or pull-start your

vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Under U.S. federal law, any modification

to the original-equipment emission

control system before the first sale and

registration of a vehicle is subject to

penalties. In some states, such

modification made on a used vehicle is

also subject to penalties.

While the engine is off, the sound of a

valve opening and closing can be heard

at the rear of the vehicle, however this

does not indicate an abnormality. The

vehicle has a self-checking device and

it operates while the engine is off.

Warning!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you

park over materials that can burn. Such

materials might be grass or leaves coming

into contact with your exhaust system. Do

not park or operate your vehicle in areas

where your exhaust system can contact

anything that can burn.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND

INSTRUMENTS..............77

MAINTENANCE MONITOR —

IF EQUIPPED ...............83

FUEL ECONOMY MONITOR —

IF EQUIPPED ...............86

WARNING LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES ................88

PERSONALIZATION FEATURES . .107

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM — OBD II ...........111

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .112

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS

Instrument Cluster

1 — Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination

2 — Tachometer

3 — Speedometer

4 — Automatic Transmission Info Display

5 — Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/

Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

05020103-121-001AB-MPG

Instrument Cluster

Odometer/Trip Computer

The display mode can be changed from

odometer to “Trip computer A” to “Trip

computer B” and then back to

odometer by pushing the selector while

one of them is displayed.

The selected mode will be displayed.

When the ignition is placed in the ACC

or OFF position, the odometer or trip

cannot be displayed. Pushing the

selector can switch the trip or reset it

for a ten-minute period in the following

cases:

After the ignition is cycled to OFF

from ON.

After the driver's door is opened.

Odometer

The odometer records the total

distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip Computer

The trip computer can record the total

distance of two trips. One is recorded in

“Trip A”, and the other is recorded in

“Trip B”.

For instance, “Trip A” can record the

distance from the point of origin, and

“Trip B” can record the distance from

where the fuel tank is filled.

When “Trip A” is selected, pushing the

selector again within one second will

change to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A”

is selected, TRIP A will be displayed.

When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B will

be displayed.

The trip computer records the total

distance the vehicle is driven until the

meter is again reset. Return it to “0.0”

by depressing and holding the selector

for one second or more.

Use this meter to measure trip

distances and to compute fuel

consumption.

If the fuel economy data is reset using

the fuel economy monitor or Trip “A” is

reset using the trip meter, the fuel

economy data and Trip “A” are reset

simultaneously when the fuel economy

monitor with the trip meter is on.

Note: Only the trip records tenths of

miles (kilometers).

Trip Computer Reset

The trip computer will be erased when:

The power supply is interrupted

(blown fuse or the battery is

disconnected).

The vehicle is driven over

9999.9 miles.

05020102-121-001AB

Odometer/Trip Reset Button

1 — Odometer/Trip Reset Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed

of the vehicle.

Instrument Panel

Illumination

When the position lights are turned on

with the ignition switched ON, the

brightness of the instrument panel

illumination is dimmed. When the

position lights are turned on, the

warning light in the instrument

cluster turns on (see “Headlights” in

“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”

chapter).

Brightness Adjustment

The brightness of the instrument panel

and dashboard illuminations can be

adjusted by rotating the knob:

The brightness decreases by rotating

the knob to the left. A beep sound will

be heard when the knob has been

rotated to the maximum dim position.

The brightness increases by rotating

the knob to the right.

Cancelling Illumination Dimmer

Rotate the knob to the right until a beep

is heard while the instrument cluster is

dimmed with the ignition switched ON.

If the instrument cluster's visibility is

reduced due to glare from surrounding

brightness, cancel the illumination

dimmer.

When the illumination dimmer is

canceled, the instrument cluster cannot

be dimmed even if the position lights

are turned on. When the illumination

dimmer is canceled, the screen in the

center display switches to constant

display of the daytime screen.

Trip Computer And Info

Switch

The following information can be

selected by pushing the INFO switch

with the ignition in the ON position:

Distance-to-empty (approximate

distance you can travel on the available

fuel).

Average fuel economy.

Current fuel economy.

Average vehicle speed.

If you have any problems with your trip

computer, contact an authorized dealer.

05020102-121-001AB

Dimmer Knob

1 — Instrument Cluster Illumination

Dimmer Knob

0620500-122-001

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

Distance-To-Empty Mode

This mode displays the approximate

distance you can travel on the

remaining fuel based on the fuel

economy.

The distance-to-empty will be

calculated and displayed every second.

Note:

Even though the distance-to-empty

display may indicate a sufficient

amount of remaining driving distance

before refueling is required, refuel as

soon as possible if the fuel level is very

low or the low fuel warning light

illuminates.

The display may not change unless

you add more than approximately

2.3 gallons (9 liters) of fuel.

The distance-to-empty is the

approximate remaining distance the

vehicle can be driven until all the

graduation marks in the fuel gauge

(indicating the remaining fuel supply)

disappear.

If there is no past fuel economy

information such as after first

purchasing your vehicle or the

information is deleted when the battery

cables are disconnected, the actual

distance-to empty/range may differ

from the amount indicated.

Average Fuel Economy Mode

This mode displays the average fuel

economy by calculating the total fuel

consumption and the total traveled

distance since purchasing the vehicle,

reconnecting the battery after

disconnection, or resetting the data.

The average fuel economy is calculated

and displayed every minute. To clear

the data being displayed, push the

INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds.

After pushing the INFO switch, “- - -

mpg” (“---L/100km”)willbe

displayed for about 1 minute before the

fuel economy is recalculated and

displayed.

Current Fuel Economy Mode

This mode displays the current fuel

economy by calculating the amount of

fuel consumption and the distance

traveled. Current fuel economy will be

calculated and displayed every two

seconds.

When you've slowed to about 3 MPH

(5km/h),“---mpg”(“---L/100km”)

will be displayed.

0502011019A019

Distance To Empty Display Screen

05020110199019

Current Fuel Economy Display

Screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Average Vehicle Speed Mode

This mode displays the average vehicle

speed by calculating the distance and

the time traveled since connecting the

battery or resetting the data.

Average vehicle speed will be

calculated and displayed every

10 seconds. To clear the data being

displayed, push the INFO switch for

more than 1.5 seconds.

After pushing the INFO switch, “- - -

MPH” (“---km/h”)willbedisplayed for

about 1 minute before the vehicle

speed is recalculated and displayed.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute

(rpm).

The range varies depending on the type

of gauge.

Engine Coolant

Temperature Gauge And

Fuel Gauge

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

0502011020110C

Average Vehicle Speed Display

Screen

05020103-12A-002AB

Tachometer

1 — Tachometer Display

0502010417A007

Fuel/Temperature Gauge

1 — Engine Coolant Temperature

2 — Fuel Gauge

Note: If the high engine coolant

temperature warning light (red) turns

on, there is a possibility of overheating.

Park the vehicle in a safe place

immediately and take appropriate

measures. If the vehicle continues to be

driven, it could cause damage to the

engine.

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge 2 shows approximately

how much fuel is remaining in the tank

when the ignition is in the ON position.

We recommend keeping the tank over

1/4 full.

E = Empty

F = Full

If the low fuel warning light illuminates

or the fuel level is very low, refuel as

soon as possible.

Note:

After refueling, it may require some

time for the indicator to stabilize. In

addition, the indicator may deviate

while driving on a slope or curve since

the fuel moves in the tank.

The display indicating a quarter or

less remaining fuel has more segments

to show the remaining fuel level in

greater detail.

The direction of the arrow on the

fuel gauge indicates that the fuel door

lid is on the left side of the vehicle.

Outside Temperature

Display

When the ignition is in the ON position,

the outside temperature is displayed.

Under the following conditions, the

outside temperature display may differ

from the actual outside temperature

depending on the surroundings and

vehicle conditions:

Significantly cold or hot

temperatures.

Sudden changes in outside

temperature.

The vehicle is parked.

The vehicle is driven at low speeds.

Changing The Temperature Unit Of

The Outside Temperature Display

The outside temperature unit can be

switched between Fahrenheit and

Celsius using the following procedure.

Settings can be changed through the

Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to

“Personalization Features” in this

chapter.

Note: When the temperature unit

indicated in the outside temperature

display is changed, the temperature

unit indicated in the engine coolant

gauge display changes in conjunction

with it.

Cruise Control Set

Vehicle Speed Display

The vehicle speed preset using the

cruise control is displayed.

05020107345034

Outside Temperature Screen

Display

0502010819A019

Cruise Control Display Screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MAINTENANCE

MONITOR — IF

EQUIPPED

Oil Life Reset

Proceed as follows:

1. Select the icon

on the home

screen to display the “Applications”

screen.

2. Select “Maintenance” to display the

maintenance list screen.

3. Switch the tab and select the setting

item you want to change: “Scheduled,”

“Tire Rotation,” or “Oil Change.”

Oil Life Monitor

You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:

Tab Item Explanation

Scheduled

Setting

Notification can be turned on/off.

Time (months)

Displays the time or distance until

maintenance is due. Select this item to set

the maintenance period. “Scheduled Due!” is

displayed in red, and the indicator light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster when the

remaining distance is less than 300 mi

(500 km) or the remaining number of days is

less than 15 (whichever comes first).

Distance (mile or km)

Reset

Resets the time and distance to the initial

values. Once the system turns on, it needs to

be reset whenever carrying out maintenance.

Tire Rotation

Setting Notification can be switched on/off.

Distance (mile or km)

Displays the distance until tire rotation is due.

Select this item to set the tire rotation

distance. “Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in

red and the wrench indicator light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster when the

remaining distance is less than 300 mi

(500 km).

Reset

Resets the remaining distance to the initial

value. Once the system turns on, it needs to

be reset whenever rotating the tires.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Tab Item Explanation

Oil Change

Setting

Notification can be switched on/off.

Distance (mile or km)

Displays the distance until an oil change is

due. Select this item to set the oil change

distance. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in

red, and the indicator light will illuminate in

the instrument cluster when the remaining

distance is less than 300 mi (500 km).

Reset

Resets the remaining distance to the initial

value. Once the system turns on, it needs to

be reset whenever replacing the engine oil.

Oil life (%)

Displays the engine oil life until an oil change

is due. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red

and the indicator light will illuminate in the

instrument cluster when remaining oil life

distance is less than 300 mi (500 km), or

remaining days are less than 15 (whichever

comes first).

Reset

Resets the remaining oil life to 100%. The

system must be reset whenever replacing the

engine oil.

(*) The engine oil flexible maintenance setting is available (only some models). Consult an authorized dealer for details. When the

engine oil flexible maintenance setting is selected, you will see the following items in the display.

The vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions and lets you know when an oil change is

due by illuminating the indicator light in the instrument cluster.

FUEL ECONOMY

MONITOR —

IF EQUIPPED

Description

The “Fuel Consumption” information is

displayed by operating each icon in the

display.

In addition, after completing a trip, the

total energy efficiency to date is

displayed in the ending display when

the ending display is turned on.

Proceed as follows:

1. Select the

icon on the home

screen to display the applications

screen.

2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”.

3. Operate the Multimedia Control

Knob or touch the screen and display

the menu.

Note: When the menu is displayed by

touching the screen, the display is

hidden automatically after 6 seconds.

Select the icon in the menu and

perform the operation. Each icon

operates as follows:

1. Hides the menu display.

2. Displays the application screen.

3. Resets the fuel economy data.

4. Displays the following setting

screen: ending display on/off switching

- On/off switching for function which

synchronizes reset fuel economy data

to trip meter (Trip A).

Fuel Consumption

Display

Information regarding fuel economy is

displayed:

1. Displays the fuel economy for the

past 60 minutes:

Displays the fuel economy every

minute for the past 1 to 10 minutes.

Displays the fuel economy every

10 minutes for the past 10 to

60 minutes.

2. Displays the average fuel economy

over the past five resets and after the

current reset.

3. Calculates the average fuel

economy every minute after vehicle

travel begins, and displays it.

05240100-36A-003

Fuel Economy Display Screen

05240101-36A-004

Average Fuel Economy

Display Screen

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Note: The fuel economy data can be

reset by doing the following operation:

Push the reset switch from the

menu screen.

When the function, which

synchronizes the fuel economy monitor

and the trip meter, is on, reset Trip A of

the trip meter.

Delete the average fuel economy

information displayed in the trip

computer.

After resetting the fuel economy data,

“-- -” is displayed while the average fuel

economy is calculated.

Ending Screen Display

If the ending display on the fuel

economy monitor is on when the

ignition is cycled from ON position to

the OFF position, the information

regarding the fuel economy is

displayed.

WARNING LIGHTS

AND MESSAGES

Warning Lights And

Messages

Note:

The warning light in the instrument

panel appears together with a

dedicated message and/or acoustic

signal when applicable. These

indications are indicative and

precautionary and as such must not be

considered as exhaustive and/or

alternative to the information contained

in the Owner’s Manual, which you are

advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this

chapter in the event of a failure

indication.

Failure indications displayed are

divided into two categories: serious

and less serious failures. Serious

failures are indicated by a repeated

and prolonged warning "cycle". Less

serious failures are indicated by a

warning "cycle" with a shorter duration.

The display cycle of both categories

can be interrupted. The instrument

panel warning light will stay on until the

cause of the failure is eliminated.

The warning contents can be verified

on the audio system.

Proceed as follows:

1. If the warning light is turned on,

select

icon on the home screen to

display the application screen.

2. Select “ Warning Guidance”to

display the current warnings.

3. Select the applicable warning to

view the warning details.

For the following warning/indicator

lights:

Master Warning Light

Brake System Warning Light

ABS Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Engine Oil Warning Light

Electric Throttle Warning Light

Cold Start Warning Light

Check Engine Warning Light

Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Automatic Transmission Warning

Light

Power Steering Malfunction Indicator

Light

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner

System Warning Light

Check Fuel Cap Warning Light

Low Fuel Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning

Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Warning Light

KEY Warning Light

LED Headlight KEY Warning Light

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFF

Indicator Light

TCS/DSC Indicator Light

DSC OFF Indicator Light

Security Indicator Light

Indicator Light

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation

Warning Light

The light turns on when the ignition is

switched on for an operation check,

and turns off a few seconds later or

when the engine is started. If the light

does not turn on or remains turned on,

have the vehicle inspected at an

authorized dealer.

Note: Only for “Brake System Warning

Light:” the light turns on continuously

when the parking brake is applied.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Parking Brake Warning - Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning

Parking Brake Warning / Warning Light Inspection

The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to STAR T or

ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

Low Brake Fluid Level Warning

If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, the

brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in a

safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Note:

Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to

have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning light

illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could

completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake

is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately.

The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedal

more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Distribution) System Warning

If the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some components

are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the

ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force

distribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized

dealer.

Note:

Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact an

authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brake

system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous.

When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency

stop than under normal circumstances.

Warning Light What It Means

Alternator Failure

If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the

charging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Note:

Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the

engine could stop unexpectedly.

Low Engine Oil Pressure

This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.

Note:

Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine

damage.

If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving:

Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.

Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump.

Inspect the engine oil level. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overf

Start the engine and check the warning light.

Note:

not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage.

If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop the engine immediate

dealer.

Door-Open Warning Light

The light turns on if any door is not closed securely.

Close the door securely.

Warning!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You

could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates when

the engine coolant temperature increases further.

Handling Procedure

Flashing Light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the

vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down.

Illuminated Light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe

place immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “Overheating” in “In Case Of Emergency” for

further information.

Note:

Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated.

Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning

A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or

does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur,

contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident.

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Key Warning Light — Illuminated

If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously.

Note:

If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber)

flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Key Warning Light — Flashing

Advanced Key Fob Malfunction

Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.

The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery.

The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas inside the

cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob into the

operation range.

A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in the

operation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key out

of the operation range.

Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle,

and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle.

Vehicle Security Alarm System

The warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

ABS Warning Light

If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, when the ABS control unit has detected a

system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no

ABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Note:

When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABS

warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does not

indicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery.

The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the

driving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer.

The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases:

The engine's electrical system has a problem.

The emission control system has a problem.

The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty.

The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely.

If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at high

speeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause

a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious

injury to the driver, occupants or others.

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel

economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is

required.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Warning Light — If Equipped

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is

lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,

optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

Note:

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair

kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to

the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s

handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire

size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of

the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light

The light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stop

the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the light

turns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously.

Note:

If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens,

the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared to

normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.

Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving

extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will

make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, park the

vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If Equipped

The light illuminates when the transmission has a problem.

Note:

If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electrical

problem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to your

transmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Master Warning Light

The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display and

verify the content.

Cold Start Disable Indicator Light

When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the

engine starting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the

instrument cluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem.

Note:

Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enable

engine starting.

Electric Throttle Control Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on

the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely

stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light

remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an

authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you

may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle

may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and

remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Lights What It Means

Led Headlight Warning Light

This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealer

as soon as possible.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped

A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions:

The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position.

The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated.

It turns on while driving the vehicle.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can

detect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate a

malfunction.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters).

The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according

to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid.

Cruise Control Activation — If Equipped

The warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TCS / DSC System Indicator Light

The warning light turns on when the in case of intervention of TCS/DSC systems. This means

that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

DSC Off Indicator Light

The warning light turns on when the DSC system is deactivated.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light

If the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not be

installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap.

100

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Green Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Left Direction Indicator

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or,

together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Right Direction Indicator

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or,

together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Parking Lights And Normal Beam Headlights

The warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control — If Equipped

The warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Key Indicator Light

The warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start.

Warning Light Flashing

When the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warning

light may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of the

key is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable.

101

Blue Warning Light

Warning Light What It Means

High Beam Headlights

The warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light

The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after

the engine is warm.

If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has

been sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact an

authorized dealer.

102

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Seat Belt Warning Light

The seat belt warning light tur ns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seat belt

is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position.

If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied)

and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the warning light

flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated.

If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time.

If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speed

exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes again.

With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupant

classification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on

the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion

could cause sensor interference.

Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on the

passengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate depending on

the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, do not

place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not

function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If a small

child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate.

Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light

The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few

seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on,

contact an authorized dealer.

103

Message Indicated On

Display

If a message is displayed in the center

display, take appropriate action (in a

calm manner) according to the

displayed message.

If the following messages are displayed

in the center display, a vehicle system

may be malfunctioning:

Engine Coolant Temperature

High: displays if the engine coolant

temperature has increased excessively.

Charging System Malfunction:

displays if the charging system has a

malfunction.

Temperature Warning:the

following message is displayed when

the temperature around the center

display is high. Lowering the

temperature of the inside of the vehicle

or the temperature around the center

display by avoiding direct sunlight is

recommended.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

contact an authorized dealer.

Warning Sound Is

Activated

Lights-On Reminder

If lights are on and the ignition is placed

in the ACC position, or the ignition is

placed in the OFF position, a

continuous beep sound will be heard

when the driver's door is opened.

Note:

When the ignition is placed in the

ACC position, the “Ignition Not Cycled

Off Warning Beep” overrides the

lights-on reminder.

A personalized function is available

to change the sound volume for the

lights-on reminder.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner

System Warning Beep

If there is a problem with the air

bag/seat belt pretensioner systems and

the warning light illumination, a warning

beep sound will be heard for about

5 seconds every minute.

The air bag and seat belt pretensioner

system warning beep sound will

continue to be heard for approximately

35 minutes. Contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

Do not drive the vehicle with the air

bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning

beep sounding. Driving the vehicle with the

air bag/seat belt pretensioner system

warning beep sounding is dangerous. In a

collision, the air bags and the seat belt

pretensioner system will not deploy and this

could result in death or serious injury.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

Seat Belt Warning Beep

Except Mexico

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened

when the ignition is in the ON position,

a beep sound will be heard for about

six seconds.

If the driver or the passengers seat belt

is not fastened and the vehicle is driven

at a speed faster than about 12 MPH

(20 km/h), a beep sound will be heard

again for a specified period of time.

Until a seat belt is fastened or a given

period of time has elapsed, the beep

sound will not stop even if the vehicle

speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h).

104

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Note:

To allow the passenger occupant

classification sensor to function

properly, do not place and sit on an

additional seat cushion on the

passengers seat. The sensor may not

function properly because the

additional seat cushion could cause

sensor interference.

If a small child is seated on the

passengers seat, the warning beep

may not operate.

Mexico

If the vehicle speed exceeds about

12 MPH (20 km/h) with the driver or

passengers seat belt unfastened, a

warning beep sounds continuously. If

the seat belt remains unfastened, the

beep sound stops once and then

continues for about 90 seconds. The

beep stops after the driver or

passengers seat belt is fastened.

Until a seat belt is fastened or a given

period of time has elapsed, the beep

sound will not stop even if the vehicle

speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h).

Warning!

Placing heavy items on the front

passenger seat may cause the front

passenger seat belt warning function to

operate depending on the weight of the

item.

To allow the front passenger seat weight

sensor to function properly, do not place

and sit on an additional seat cushion on the

front passenger seat. The sensor may not

function properly because the additional

seat cushion could cause sensor

interference.

When a small child sits on the front

passenger seat, it is possible that the

warning beep will not operate.

Ignition Not Switched OFF

If the driver's door is opened while the

ignition is placed in the ACC position, a

continuous beep sound will be heard to

notify the driver that the ignition has not

been placed in the OFF position.

Left in this condition, the keyless entry

system will not operate, the car cannot

be locked, and the battery power will

be depleted.

Key Removed From Vehicle

Warning Beep

A beep sound will be heard six times

and the

warning light (red) will flash

continuously if the ignition has not been

placed in the OFF position, all the doors

are closed, and the key fob is removed

from the vehicle.

This is to notify the driver that the key

fob has been removed from the vehicle

and the ignition has not been placed in

the OFF position.

Note: Because the key fob uses

low-intensity radio waves, the

warning may activate if the key fob

is carried together with a metal object

or it is placed in a poor signal reception

area.

Request Switch Inoperable Warning

Beep — If Equipped With Advanced

Keyless Function

If the request switch on the exterior

door handle is pushed with a door

open, or the ignition has not been

placed in the OFF position, a beep will

be heard for about two seconds to

indicate that the doors, and trunk lid

cannot be locked.

105

Key Left-In-Trunk Compartment

Warning Beep — If Equipped With

Advanced Keyless Function

If the key fob is left in the trunk with all

doors locked and the trunk lid closed, a

beep sound is heard for about ten

seconds to remind the driver the key

fob has been left in the trunk.

If this happens, open the trunk lid by

pushing the electric trunk lid opener

and remove the key fob.

A key fob removed from the trunk may

not function because its functions may

have been temporarily suspended. To

restore the key fob function, perform

the applicable procedure (see

paragraph “Keys” in “Getting to know

your vehicle” chapter).

Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep

(with the advanced keyless function)

If a key fob is left in the vehicle and all

the doors and the trunk are locked

using a separate key fob, a beep sound

is heard for about ten seconds to

remind the driver that the key fob has

been left in the vehicle.

If this happens, open the door and

remove the key fob. A key fob removed

from the vehicle this way may not

function because its functions may

have been temporarily suspended.

Perform the applicable procedure to

restore the functions of the key fob (see

paragraph “Keys” in “Getting To Know

Your Vehicle” chapter).

Vehicle Speed Alarm — If Equipped

The vehicle speed alarm function is

designed to alarm the driver via a single

beep sound and a warning indication in

the instrument cluster that the

previously set vehicle speed has been

exceeded.

You can change the vehicle speed

setting at which the warning is triggered

(see paragraph “Trip Computer” in

“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”

chapter).

Tire Inflation Pressure Warning

Beep — If Equipped

Vehicle With Conventional Tires:the

warning beep sound will be heard for

about three seconds when there is any

abnormality in tire inflation pressures

(see “TMPS” in “Safety” chapter).

Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires

(If Equipped): the warning beep sound

will be heard for about three seconds if

the tire pressures decrease. If the tire

pressure decreases extremely, a beep

sound will be heard for approximately

30 seconds (see “TMPS” in “Safety”

chapter).

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

System Warning Beep —

If Equipped

Driving Forward: the warning beep

operates when the direction indicator

lever is operated to the side where the

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning

light is illuminated.

Note: A personalized function is

available to change the Blind Spot

Monitoring (BSM) warning beep sound

volume.

Reversing: if a moving object such as

a vehicle or two-wheeled vehicle

approaches on the left or right from

behind your vehicle, the Blind Spot

Monitoring (BSM) warning sound is

activated.

Electronic Steering Lock Warning

Beep

The warning beep operates if the

steering wheel is not unlocked after the

keyless ignition START/STOP button is

pushed.

Speed Limiter Warning Beep —

If Equipped

If the vehicle speed exceeds the set

speed by about 2 MPH (3 km/h) or

more, a warning beep operates

continuously.

The warning beep operates until the

vehicle speed decreases to the set

speedorless.

106

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PERSONALIZATION FEATURES

Overview

The following Personalization Features can be set or changed by the customer or by an authorized dealer.

Personalization Features differ depending on the market and specification.

Settings change method

1. Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen

A: Refer to the “Settings” paragraph in Fiat Connect 7.0 Supplement for further information.

B: Refer to “Fuel Economy Monitor” paragraph in this chapter.

2. Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches

C: Refer to “Auto Lock/Unlock Function” paragraph in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

D: Refer to “Key Fob” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

E: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With Request Switch (With The Advanced Keyless Function)” (Doors) in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

3. Settings can be changed by an authorized dealer (refer to the following table)

X: Refer to your authorized dealer for setting change.

Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings

Settings Change Method

123

Safety

Blind

Spot

Monitoring

System (if

equipped)

Warning Beep Volume (*) High High/Low/Off A — X

107

Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings

Settings Change Method

123

Vehicle

Door

Locks

Operation condition of

auto lock/unlock function

Lock: When

Driving/Unlock: IGN

Off

Lock: When

Driving/Unlock: In

Park/Lock: Out of Park

Unlock: In Park/Lock:

Shifting Out of Park/

Lock: When Driving

Unlock: IGN Off/ Lock:

When Driving/Off

ACX

Keyless

Entry

System

Time for locking door

automatically

30 seconds

90 seconds/

60 seconds/30

seconds

A—X

Advanced

Keyless

Entry

System

Time for locking door

automatically

30 seconds

90 seconds/

60 seconds/30

seconds

A—X

Auto-lock function

operation/non operational

Off On/Off A — X

Beep volume when

locking/unlocking

Off or Medium High/Medium/Low/Off A D/E X

Illuminated

Entry

System

Time until interior lights

turn off after closing door

15 seconds

60 seconds/

30 seconds/15

seconds/7.5 seconds

A—X

Time until interior lights

turn off automatically

when any door is not

closed completely

30 minutes

60 minutes/

30 minutes/10 minutes

A—X

Auto-Wiper

Control

Operational/non-

operational

On On/Off (**) A — X

108

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings

Settings Change Method

123

Daytime

Running

Lights

(DRL)

Operational/non-

operational

On On/Off — — X

Auto

headlight off

(***)

Time until headlights turn

off

30 second

120 seconds/

90 seconds/

60 seconds/

30 seconds/Off (****)

A—X

Auto-Light

Control

Timing by which lights

turn on

Medium

High/Med.

High/Medium/Med.

Low/Low

A—X

Adaptive

Front

Lighting

System

(AFS)

Operational/non-

operational (***)

On On/Off A — X

Lights-On

Reminder Warning beep volume High High/Low/Off A — X

Coming

Home

System

Time until headlights turn

off

30 seconds

120 seconds/

90 seconds/60

seconds/30 seconds/

Off

A—X

Leaving

Home Light

System

Operational/Non-

operational

On or Off On/Off A — X

Turn Signals Beep volume Low High/Low A — X

Three-Flash

Turn Signal

Operational/Non-

operational

On or Off On/Off A — X

109

Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings

Settings Change Method

123

System

Language

indicated in

display

English

Depends on market

(****)

A—X

Temperature

Temperature unit

indicated in display

°C °F/°C A — X

Distance

Distance unit indicated in

display

mi or km mi/km A — X

Fuel Economy Monitor

Ending

Display

On/Off Off On/Off B — X

Fuel

Economy

Resetting

Procedure

Linkage/non-linkage with

fuel economy reset and

trip meter reset

Off On/Off B — X

(—) Feature setting change not available.

(*) Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The volume of the

warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed.

(**) If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation.

(***) Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and FCA recommends that these

systems remain On.

(****) Available only in display from the center display.

110

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ONBOARD

DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a

sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic

system called OBD II. This system

monitors the performance of the

emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When

these systems are operating properly,

your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well

as engine emissions well within current

government regulations.

If any of these systems require service,

the OBD II system will turn on the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will

also store diagnostic codes and other

information to assist your service

technician in making repairs. Although

your vehicle will usually be drivable and

not need towing, see your authorized

dealer for service as soon as possible.

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could

cause further damage to the emission

control system. It could also affect fuel

economy and driveability. The vehicle must

be serviced before any emissions tests can

be performed.

If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is

running, severe catalytic converter damage

and power loss will soon occur. Immediate

service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic

System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an

Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II)

and a connection port to allow access

to information related to the

performance of your emissions

controls. Authorized service technicians

may need to access this information to

assist with the diagnosis and service of

your vehicle and emissions system.

Warning!

ONLY an authorized service technician

should connect equipment to the OBD II

connection port in order to diagnose or

service your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connected

to the OBD II connection port, such as a

driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be

impaired or a loss of vehicle control could

occur that may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

Access, or allow others to access,

information stored in your vehicle systems,

including personal information.

For further information, refer to

“CyberSecurity” in “Tips, Controls, and

General Information” in your Owner’s

Manual Radio Supplement.

111

EMISSIONS

INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal

requirement to pass an inspection of

your vehicle's emissions control

system. Failure to pass could prevent

vehicle registration.

For states that require

an Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M), this

check verifies the

“Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” is

functioning and is not on when the

engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be

ready. The OBD II system may not be

ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or

a battery replacement. If the OBD II

system should be determined not ready

for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the

test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition

actuated test, which you can use prior

to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,

you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, but do not crank or start the

engine.

Note: If you crank or start the engine,

you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition

switch to the ON position, you will see

the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

symbol come on as part of a normal

bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one

of two things will happen:

The MIL will flash for about

10 seconds and then return to being

fully illuminated until you turn OFF the

ignition or start the engine. This means

that your vehicle's OBD II system is not

ready and you should not proceed to

the I/M station.

The MIL will not flash at all and will

remain fully illuminated until you place

the ignition in the off position or start

the engine. This means that your

vehicle's OBD II system is ready and

you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you

should see your authorized dealer or

repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure

or replacement, you may need to do

nothing more than drive your vehicle as

you normally would in order for your

OBD II system to update. A recheck

with the above test routine may then

indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's

OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL

is illuminated during normal vehicle

operation you should have your vehicle

serviced before going to the I/M station.

The I/M station can fail your vehicle

because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

112

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

SAFETY SYSTEMS ...........114

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .116

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS ................124

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS ........124

CHILD RESTRAINT

PRECAUTIONS .............130

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT

SYSTEMSRS—AIRBAG......133

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .145

CONSTANT MONITORING ......147

113

SAFETY SYSTEMS

Safety Systems

The vehicle has the following safety

systems:

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

Traction Contol System (TCS)

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)

For the operation of the systems, see

the following pages.

ABS System (Anti-lock

Braking System)

The ABS control unit continuously

monitors the speed of each wheel. If

one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS

responds by automatically releasing

and reapplying that wheel's brake. The

driver will feel a slight vibration in the

brake pedal and may hear a chattering

noise from the brake system. This is

normal ABS system operation.

Continue to depress the brake pedal

without pumping the brakes. The

warning light turns on when the system

has a malfunction. Refer to “Warning

Lights And Messages” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

Note:

Braking distances may be longer on

loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for

example) which usually have a hard

foundation. A vehicle with a normal

braking system may require less

distance to stop under these

conditions because the tires will build

up a wedge of surface layer when the

wheels skid.

The sound of the ABS operating

may be heard when starting the engine

or immediately after starting the

vehicle; however, it does not indicate a

malfunction.

Warning!

The ABS contains sophisticated

electronic equipment that may be

susceptible to interference caused by

improperly installed or high output radio

transmitting equipment. This interference

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking

capability. Installation of such equipment

should be performed by qualified

professionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will

diminish their effectiveness and may lead to

a collision. Pumping makes the stopping

distance longer. Just press firmly on your

brake pedal when you need to slow down

or stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural

laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase braking or steering

efficiency beyond that afforded by the

condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or

the traction afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions,

including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, following another vehicle

too closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equipped

vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner that could

jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

114

SAFETY

TCS System (Traction

Control System)

Warning!

The capability of the TCS must never be

tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in

such a way as to compromise personal

safety and the safety of others.

The Traction Control System (TCS)

enhances traction and safety by

controlling engine torque and braking.

When the TCS detects driving wheel

slippage, it can lower engine torque and

operate the brakes to prevent loss of

traction. This means that on a slick

surface, the engine adjusts

automatically to provide optimum

power to the drive wheels, limiting

wheel spin and loss of traction.

The indicator light turns on when the

system has a malfunction. Refer to

“Warning Lights And Messages” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

TCS / DSC Indicator Light

The

indicator light stays on for a few

seconds when the ignition is placed in

the ON mode.

If the TCS or DSC is operating, the

indicator light flashes.

If the

indicator light stays on, the

TCS, DSC or the brake assist system

may have a malfunction and they may

not operate correctly. Contact your

authorized dealer.

Note:

In addition to the indicator light

flashing, a slight sound will come from

the engine. This indicates that the

TCS/DSC is operating properly.

On slippery surfaces, such as fresh

snow, it will be impossible to achieve

high rpm when the TCS is on.

DSC System (Dynamic

Stability Control)

The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)

automatically controls braking and

engine torque in conjunction with

systems such as ABS and TCS to help

control side slip when driving on

slippery surfaces, or during sudden or

evasive maneuvering, enhancing vehicle

safety. Refer to “ABS System (Antilock

Brake System)” and “TCS System

(Traction Control System)” in this

chapter for further information.

DSC operation is possible at speeds

greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).

The indicator light turns on when the

system has a malfunction. Refer to

“Warning Lights And Messages” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Note: The DSC may not operate

correctly unless the following are

observed:

Use tires of the correct size

specified for your vehicle on all four

wheels.

Use tires of the same manufacturer,

brand and tread pattern on all four

wheels.

Do not mix worn tires.

Note: The DSC may not operate

correctly when tire chains are used.

TCS / DSC Indicator Light

The

indicator light stays on for a few

seconds when the ignition is placed in

the ON mode. It also illuminates when

the DSC OFF switch is pressed and

TCS/DSC is switched off.

If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or

the brake assist system may have a

malfunction and they may not operate

correctly. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer.

DSC OFF Indicator Light

The

indicator light stays on for a few

seconds when the ignition is placed in

the ON mode. It also illuminates when

the DSC OFF switch is pressed and

TCS/DSC is switched off.

If the light remains illuminated and the

TCS/DSC is not switched off, contact

your authorized dealer. The DSC may

have a malfunction.

115

DSC OFF Switch

Pushtheswitchtoturnoffthe

TCS/DSC. The

indicator light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate. Push

the switch again to turn the TCS/DSC

back on. The indicator light will turn off.

Note:

When DSC is on and you attempt

to free the vehicle when it is stuck, or

drive it out of freshly fallen snow, the

TCS (part of the DSC system) will

activate. Depressing the accelerator

will not increase engine power and

freeing the vehicle may be difficult.

When this happens, turn off the

TCS/DSC.

If the TCS/DSC is off when the

engine is turned off, it automatically

activates when the ignition is placed in

the ON mode.

Warning!

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. DSC cannot prevent accidents,

including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery

surfaces, or hydroplaning. DSC also cannot

prevent accidents resulting from loss of

vehicle control due to inappropriate driver

input for the conditions. Only a safe,

attentive, and skillful driver can prevent

accidents. The capabilities of an DSC

equipped vehicle must never be exploited

in a reckless or dangerous manner which

could jeopardize the user’s safety or the

safety of others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure to

properly maintain your vehicle, may change

the handling characteristics of your vehicle,

and may negatively affect the performance

of the DSC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking

system, tire type and size or wheel size

may adversely affect DSC performance.

Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires

may also degrade DSC performance. Any

vehicle modification or poor vehicle

maintenance that reduces the effectiveness

of the DSC system can increase the risk of

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,

personal injury and death.

AUXILIARY DRIVING

SYSTEMS

Blind Spot Monitoring

(BSM) System

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

system is designed to assist the driver

during lane changes by alerting the

driver to the presence of vehicles

approaching from the rear in an

adjacent lane.

The system detects vehicles

approaching from the rear while

traveling in the forward direction at a

speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) or faster,

and will activate the BSM warning lights

equipped within the door mirrors.

If the turn signal lever is operated to

signal a lane change in the direction in

which the warning light is illuminated,

the system warns the driver of a vehicle

in the detection area by flashing the

warning light and activating an audible

alert.

05060301-12A-001

DSC OFF Switch

116

SAFETY

The detection area on this system

covers the driving lanes on both sides

of the vehicle and from the rear part of

the doors to about 164 ft (50 m) behind

the vehicle.

Activation / Deactivation

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

system will operate when all of the

following conditions are met:

The ignition is ON.

The BSM switch is pushed and the

warning light in the instrument cluster is

turned off.

The vehicle speed is 19 mph

(30 km/h ) or faster.

The BSM system will not operate under

the following conditions:

The vehicle speed falls below about

15 mph (25 km/h) even though the

warning light is turned off.

The gear selector is shifted to

REVERSE.

In the following cases, the warning light

in the instrument cluster illuminates and

operation of the BSM system is

deactivated.

A problem with the system (including

the BSM warning lights) is detected.

A large change in position of a rear

radar sensor on the vehicle has

occurred.

There is a large accumulation of

snow or ice on the rear bumper near a

rear radar sensor . Remove any snow,

ice or mud on the rear bumper.

Driving on snow covered roads for

long periods.

The temperature near the rear radar

sensors becomes extremely hot due to

driving for long periods on inclines

during warm weather.

The battery voltage has decreased.

If the warning light in the instrument

cluster remains illuminated, have the

vehicle inspected at an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Note: Under the following conditions,

the rear radar sensors cannot detect

objects, or it may be difficult to detect

them:

A vehicle is in the detection area at

the rear in an adjacent driving lane but

it does not approach. The BSM system

determines the condition based on

radar detection data.

A vehicle is traveling alongside your

vehicle at nearly the same speed for an

extended period of time.

Vehicles approaching in the

opposite direction.

A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane

is attempting to pass your vehicle.

A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a

road with extremely wide driving lanes.

The detection area of the rear radar

sensors is set at the road width of

expressways.

0528070012A002

BSM Detection Areas

1 — Detection Area

117

In the following cases, the activation of

the BSM warning lights and the audible

alert may not occur, or they may be

delayed:

A vehicle makes a lane change from

a driving lane two lanes over to an

adjacent lane.

Driving on steep inclines.

Crossing the summit of a hill or

mountain pass.

The turning radius is small (making a

sharp turn or turning at intersections).

Whenthereisadifferenceinthe

height between your driving lane and

the adjacent lane.

Immediately after pushing the BSM

switch and the system becomes

operable.

If the road width is extremely narrow,

vehicles two lanes over may be

detected. The detection area of the rear

radar sensors is set according to the

road width of expressways.

The BSM warning lights may turn on in

reaction to stationary objects on the

road or the roadside such as guardrails,

tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles.

A BSM warning light may flash or the

audible alert may be activated several

times when making a turn at a city

intersection.

Turn off the BSM system while pulling a

trailer or while an accessory such as a

bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of

the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s

sound system waves will be blocked

causing the system to not operate

normally.

In the following cases, it may be difficult

to view the illumination/flashing of the

BSM warning lights equipped on the

door mirrors:

Snow or ice is adhering to the door

mirrors.

The door glass is fogged or covered

in snow, frost or dirt.

The system switches to the Rear Cross

Traffic Alert function when the gear

selector is shifted to the REVERSE

position.

BSM Warning Lights

The BSM warning lights are equipped

on the left and right door mirrors.

The warning lights turn on when a

vehicle approaching from the rear in an

adjacent lane is detected.

When the ignition is switched ON, the

malfunction warning light in the

instrument cluster illuminates

momentarily and then turns off after a

few seconds.

Forward Driving (BSM System

Operation)

The BSM system detects vehicles

approaching from the rear and turns on

the warning lights equipped on the door

mirrors according to the conditions.

Additionally, while a warning light is

illuminated, if the turn signal lever is

operated to signal a turn in the direction

in which the warning light is illuminated,

the warning light flashes.

Reverse Driving (RCTA System

Operation)

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

system detects vehicles approaching

from the left and right of your vehicle

and flashes the BSM warning lights.

05280701-12A-001

BSM Warning Light

118

SAFETY

Function For Canceling Illumination

Dimmer

When the headlight switch is in the

or position, the brightness of

the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

warning lights is dimmed. If the Blind

Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights

are difficult to see due to glare from

surrounding brightness when traveling

on snow-covered roads or under foggy

conditions, push the dimmer

cancellation button to cancel the

dimmer and increase the brightness of

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning

lights when they turn on.

Refer to “Instrument Panel Illumination”

in “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

BSM Warning Beep

The BSM audible alert is activated

simultaneously with the flashing of a

BSM warning light.

BSM Switch

When the BSM switch is pushed, the

BSM and RCTA systems are turned off

and the BSM off indicator light in the

instrument cluster turns on.

If the switch is pushed again, the BSM

and RCTA systems become operable

and the BSM off indicator light turns off.

Note:

When the ignition is switched OFF,

the condition before the system was

turned off is maintained. For example,

if the ignition is switched OFF while the

BSM and RCTA systems are

operational, the BSM and RCTA

systems remain operational the next

time the ignition is switched ON.

The BSM and RCTA systems are

turned off when the battery is

disconnected such as when the

battery terminals or fuses have been

removed and reinstalled. To turn the

BSM and RCTA systems back on,

push the BSM switch.

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

Function

The RCTA system is designed to assist

the driver in checking the area to the

rear of the vehicle on both sides while

the vehicle is in REVERSE by alerting

the driver to the presence of vehicles

approaching the rear of the vehicle.

The RCTA system detects vehicles

approaching from the left and right

sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is

reversing out of a parking space, and

notifies the driver of possible danger

using the BSM warning lights and an

audible alert.

05280703-12A-001

BSM Switch Location

05281200-03A-001

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

1 — Your Vehicle

2 — Approaching Vehicles Left

And Right

119

RCTA Operation

The RCTA system operates when the

gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE

position.

If there is the possibility of a collision

with an approaching vehicle, the BSM

warning light flashes and the audible

alert is activated simultaneously.

With Rear View Camera

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

warning indication in the rearview

monitor also synchronizes with the

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning

indicator light on the door mirrors.

In the following cases, the BSM off

indicator light turns on and operation of

the system is deactivated. If the BSM

off indicator light in the instrument

cluster remains illuminated:

A problem with the system including

the BSM warning lights has occurred.

A large change in the position of a

rear radar sensor on the vehicle has

occurred.

There is a large accumulation of

snow or ice on the rear bumper near a

rear radar sensor.

Driving on snow-covered roads for

long periods.

The temperature near the radar

sensors becomes extremely hot due to

driving for long periods on inclines

during warm weather.

The battery voltage has decreased.

Have the vehicle inspected at an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

0528140012A002

RCTA Detection

120

SAFETY

Note: Under the following conditions,

the rear radar sensors cannot detect

objects or it may be difficult to detect

them:

The vehicle speed while in

REVERSE is about 6 mph (10 km/h )

or faster.

The rear radar sensor detection

area is obstructed by a nearby wall or

parked vehicle (reverse the vehicle to a

position where the radar sensor

detection area is no longer obstructed).

A vehicle is approaching directly to

the rear of your vehicle.

The vehicle is parked on an incline.

Immediately after pushing the BSM

switch and the system becomes

operable.

In the following cases, it may be difficult

to view the illumination/flashing of the

BSM warning lights equipped on the

door mirrors:

Snow or ice adheres to the door

mirrors.

The door glass is fogged or covered

in snow, frost or dirt.

Turn off the RCTA system while pulling

a trailer or while an accessory such as a

bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of

the vehicle.

Otherwise, the sound system waves

emitted by the radar will be blocked

causing the system to not operate

normally.

05281200-03A-003

Sensors Obstructed By Nearby

Vehicles

05281200-03A-004

Another Vehicle Approaching

Directly To The Rear Of Your

Vehicle

05281200-03A-005

Your Vehicle Parked On An Incline

121

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System —

Abarth

The TPMS system monitors the

pressure for each tire.

If tire pressure is too low in one or more

tires, the system will inform the driver

via the

warning light in the

instrument cluster and by the warning

beep sound.

The tire pressure sensors installed on

each wheel send tire pressure data by

radio signal to the receiver unit in the

vehicle.

TPMS does not alleviate your need to

check the pressure and condition of all

four tires regularly.

Each tire, including the spare (if

equipped), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than

the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that

illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale

illuminates, you should stop and check

your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle's handling

and stopping ability. Please note that

the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver's

responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination

of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate

tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS

malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle

to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function properly.

System Error Activation

When the

warning light flashes,

there may be a system malfunction.

Contact your authorized dealer.

A system error activation may occur in

the following cases:

When there is equipment or a device

near the vehicle using the same radio

frequency as that of the tire pressure

sensors.

When a metallic device such as a

non-genuine navigation system is

equipped near the center of the

dashboard, which may block radio

signals from the tire pressure sensor to

the receiver unit.

When using the following devices in

the vehicle that may cause radio

interference with the receiver unit.

A digital device such as a personal

computer.

A current converter device such as a

DC-AC converter.

When excess snow or ice adheres to

the vehicle, especially around the

wheels.

When the tire pressure sensor

batteries are discharged.

When using a wheel with no tire

pressure sensor installed.

122

SAFETY

When using tires with steel wire

reinforcement in the side walls.

When using tire chains.

Tires And Wheels

Note: When inspecting or adjusting the

tire air pressures, do not apply

excessive force to the stem portion of

the wheel unit. The stem portion could

be damaged.

Changing Tires And Wheels

The following procedure allows the

TPMS to recognize a tire pressure

sensor's unique ID signal code

whenever tires or wheels are changed,

such as changing to and from winter

tires.

Note:

Each tire pressure sensor has a

unique ID signal code. The signal code

must be registered with the TPMS

before it can work. The easiest way to

do it is to have your authorized dealer

change your tire and complete ID

signal code registration.

When your authorized dealer

changes your vehicle's tires, they will

complete the tire pressure sensor ID

signal code registration.

If you or someone else changes tires,

you or someone else can also

undertake the steps for the TPMS to

complete the ID signal code

registration:

After tires have been changed, place

the ignition in the ON mode, then back

to ACC or OFF modes.

Wait for about 15 minutes.

After about 15 minutes, drive the

vehicle at a speed of at least 16 mph

(25 km/h) for 20 minutes and the tire

pressure sensor ID signal code will be

registered automatically.

Note: If the vehicle is driven within

about 15 minutes of changing tires, the

warning light will flash because the

sensor ID signal code would not have

been registered. If this happens, park

the vehicle for about 15 minutes, after

which the sensor ID signal code will

20 minutes.

Replacing Tires And Wheels

Note:

When replacing/repairing the tires or

wheels or both, have the work done by

your authorized dealer, or the tire

pressure sensors may be damaged.

The wheels equipped on your

vehicle are specially designed for

installation of the tire pressure sensors.

Do not use non-genuine wheels,

otherwise it may not be possible to

install the tire pressure sensors.

Be sure to have the tire pressure

sensors installed whenever tires or

wheels are replaced.

When having a tire or wheel or both

replaced, the following types of tire

pressure sensor installations are

possible:

The tire pressure sensor is removed

from the old wheel and installed to the

new one.

The same tire pressure sensor is

used with the same wheel. Only the tire

is replaced.

A new tire pressure sensor is

installed to a new wheel.

Note:

The tire pressure sensor ID signal

code must be registered when a new

tire pressure sensor is purchased. For

purchase of a tire pressure sensor and

registration of the tire pressure sensor

ID signal code, consult your authorized

dealer.

123

When reinstalling a previously

removed tire pressure sensor to a

wheel, replace the grommet (seal

between valve body/sensor and wheel)

for the tire pressure sensor.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS

pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system operation

or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the

same size, type, and/or style. The TPM

sensor is not designed for use on

aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a

poor overall system performance or sensor

damage. Customers are encouraged to

use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM

feature operation.

Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After

using an aftermarket tire sealant it is

recommended that you take your vehicle to

an authorized dealer to have your sensor

function checked.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt

from entering the valve stem, which could

damage the TPMS sensor.

The following regulatory statement

applies to all radio frequency (RF)

devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

(2) This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

OCCUPANT

RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

The most important safety equipment

of the vehicle comprise the following

protection systems:

Seat Belts

SBA (Seat Belt Alert) System

Head Restraints

Child Restraint Systems

Front Air Bags And Side Air Bags

Read the information given in the

following pages with the utmost care.

It is of fundamental importance that the

protection systems are used in the

correct way to guarantee the maximum

possible safety level for the driver and

the passengers.

124

SAFETY

SEAT BELT

SYSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an

excellent driver, even on short trips.

Someone on the road may be a poor

driver and could cause a collision that

includes you. This can happen far away

from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts

save lives, and they can reduce the

seriousness of injuries in a collision.

Some of the worst injuries happen

when people are thrown from the

vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility

of ejection and the risk of injury caused

by striking the inside of the vehicle.

Everyone in a motor vehicle should be

belted at all times.

Seat Belt Precautions

Seat belts help to decrease the

possibility of severe injury during

accidents and sudden stops. FCA

recommends that the driver and

passengers always wear seat belts.

Mexico

All the seats have lap/shoulder belts.

These belts have retractors with inertia

locks that keep them out of the way

when not in use.

The locks allow the belts to remain

comfortable on users, but they will lock

in position during a collision.

Except Mexico

All of the seat belt retractors are

designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts

out of the way when not in use.

The driver's seat belt has no provisions

for child-restraint systems and has only

an emergency locking mode.

The driver may wear it comfortably, and

it will lock during a collision.

However, the passenger's seat

lap/shoulder belt retractor operates in

two modes: emergency locking mode,

and for child-restraint systems,

automatic locking mode. If you must

use the passenger seat for a child, slide

the passenger seat as far back as

possible and make sure any child

restraint system is secured properly.

Belt retraction may become difficult if

the belts and seat belt guides are

soiled, so try to keep them clean. Refer

to “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors,”

found in Servicing And Maintenance”

for further information.

Warning!

Relying on the air bags alone could lead

to more severe injuries in a collision. The air

bags work with your seat belt to restrain

you properly. In some collisions, the air

bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your

seat belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengers

can suffer much greater injuries if you are

not properly buckled up. You can strike the

interior of your vehicle or other passengers,

or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.

Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more likely

to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

03020100-12A-001

Seat Belt Routing Guide

125

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Occupants, including the driver, should

always wear their seat belts whether or not

an air bag is also provided at their seating

position to minimize the risk of severe injury

or death in the event of a crash.

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much

worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or

you could even slide out of the seat belt.

Follow these instructions to wear your seat

belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

Two people should never be belted into

a single seat belt. People belted together

can crash into one another in a collision,

hurting one another badly. Never use a

lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than

one person, no matter what their size.

A lap belt worn too high can increase

the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt

forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic

bones, but across your abdomen. Always

wear the lap part of your seat belt as low

as possible and keep it snug.

A twisted seat belt may not protect you

properly. In a collision, it could even cut into

you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against

your body, without twists. If you can’t

straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it

to your authorized dealer immediately and

have it fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into the

wrong buckle will not protect you properly.

The lap portion could ride too high on your

body, possibly causing internal injuries.

Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

A seat belt that is too loose will not

protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you

could move too far forward, increasing the

possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt

snugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your arm

is dangerous. Your body could strike the

inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,

increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt

worn under the arm can cause internal

injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your

shoulder so that your strongest bones will

take the force in a collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you will

not protect you from injury during a

collision. You are more likely to hit your

head in a collision if you do not wear your

shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are

meant to be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart

in a collision and leave you with no

protection. Inspect the seat belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or

loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble

or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a

collision.

Seat Belts And Pregnant

Women

Pregnant Women And Persons With

Serious Medical Conditions

Pregnant women should always wear

seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific

recommendations.

The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY

AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER

THE HIPS. The shoulder belt should be

worn across your shoulder properly, but

never across the stomach area.

Persons with serious medical

conditions also should wear seat belts.

Check with your doctor for any special

instructions regarding specific medical

conditions.

06050100-CHD-003

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

126

SAFETY

Emergency Locking

Mode

When the seat belt is fastened, it will

always be in the emergency locking

mode.

In the emergency locking mode, the

belt remains comfortable on the

occupant and the retractor will lock in

position during a collision.

If the belt is locked and cannot be

pulled out, retract the belt once, and

then try pulling it out slowly. If this fails,

pull the belt strongly one time and

loosen, then pull it out again slowly.

Seat Belt With Automatic Locking

Mode

When the seat belt is fastened, it will

always be in the emergency locking

mode until it is switched to automatic

locking mode by pulling it all the way

out to its full length.

If the belt feels tight and hinders

comfortable movement while the

vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may

be in the automatic locking mode

because the belt has been pulled too

far out.

To return the belt to the more

comfortable emergency locking mode,

wait until the vehicle has stopped in a

safe, level area, retract the belt fully to

convert it back to emergency locking

mode and then extend it around you

again.

Automatic Locking Mode

Always use the automatic locking mode

to keep the child-restraint system from

shifting to an unsafe position in the

event of an accident.

To enable seat belt automatic locking

mode, pull it all the way out and

connect it as instructed on the child

restraint system. It will retract down to

the child restraint system and stay

locked on it.

Warning!

The seat belt assembly must be

replaced if the switchable Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any

other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the

procedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat belt assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode

to restrain occupants who are wearing the

seat belt or children who are using booster

seats. The locked mode is only used to

install rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraints that have a harness for

restraining the child.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

Fastening The Seat Belt

03020201121001

Fastening The Seat Belt

1—SeatBelt

Tongue

2 — Seat Belt

Buckle

127

Position the lap belt as low as possible,

not on the abdominal area 2, then

adjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fits

snugly against your body.

Unfastening The Seat Belt

Depress the button on the seat belt

buckle. If the belt does not fully retract,

pull it out and check for kinks or twists.

Then make sure it remains untwisted as

it retracts.

Note:

If a belt does not fully retract,

inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still

not retracting properly, have it

inspected: contact an authorized

dealer.

Always wear the seat belt with it

correctly routed in its guide. Wearing a

seat belt without the seat belt routed in

its guide is dangerous because the

seat belt would not be able to provide

adequate protection in an accident,

which could result in serious injury.

03020201122002

Adjusting The Seat Belt

1 — Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area

2 — Lap Belt Routing

3 — Shoulder Belt Routing

03020202UNF001

Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt

1 — Seat Belt Release Button

0302020012A001

Seat Belt Routing Guides

1 — Shoulder Belt Routing Guides

128

SAFETY

Seat Belt Warning

Systems

If it detects that the occupant seat belt

is unfastened, the warning light or beep

alerts the occupant.

Referto“WarningLightsAnd

Messages” in “Getting To Knowing Your

Instrument Panel” for further

information.

Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” in

“Getting To Knowing Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Seat Belt Extender

If your seat belt is not long enough,

even when fully extended, a seat belt

extender may be available to you at no

charge from authorized dealer.

This extender will be only for you and

for the particular vehicle and seat. Even

if it plugs into other seat belts, it may

not hold in the critical moment of a

crash.

When ordering an extender, only order

one that provides the necessary

additional length to fasten the seat belt

properly. Please contact authorized

dealer for more information.

When not in use, remove the seat belt

extender and store it in the vehicle. If

the seat belt extender is left connected,

the seat belt extender might get

damaged as it will not retract with the

rest of the seat belt and can easily fall

out of the door when not in use and be

damaged.

In addition, the seat belt warning light

will not illuminate and function properly.

Warning!

Do not use a seat belt extender unless it

is necessary. Using a seat belt extender

when not necessary is dangerous. The

seat belt will be too long and not fit

properly. In an accident, the seat belt will

not provide adequate protection and you

could be seriously injured. Only use the

extender when it is required to fasten the

seat belt properly.

Do not use an improper extender. Using

a seat belt extender that is for another

person or a different vehicle or seat is

dangerous. The seat belt will not provide

adequate protection and the user could be

seriously injured in an accident. Only use

the extender provided for you and for the

particular vehicle and seat.

NEVER use the extender in a different

vehicle or seat. If you sell your vehicle, do

not leave your seat belt extender in the

vehicle. It could be used accidentally by the

new owner of the vehicle. After removing

the seat belt extender, discard it. Never use

the seat belt extender in any other vehicle

you may own in the future.

Do not use an extender that is too long.

Using an extender that is too long is

dangerous. The seat belt will not fit

properly. In an accident, the seat belt will

not provide adequate protection and you

could be seriously injured. Do not use the

extender or choose one shorter in length if

the distance between the extender's

buckle and the center of the user's body is

less than 6 inches (15 cm).

Do not leave a seat belt extender

connected to the buckle. Leaving a seat

belt extender connected to the buckle

without using the seat belt is dangerous.

When the seat belt extender is connected

to the driver's seat belt buckle (or

passenger) seat, the SRS driver's (or

passenger's) air bag system will determine

that the driver (or passenger) is wearing the

seat belt even if the driver (or passenger) is

not wearing it. This condition could cause

the driver's (or passenger's) air bag to not

activate correctly and result in death or

serious injury in the event of collision.

Always wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

Do not use the seat belt extender when

installing a child restraint system on the

passenger seat. Using a seat belt extender

to fasten a child restraint system on any

seat is dangerous. Always follow the child

restraint system manufacturer's installation

instructions and never use a seat belt

extender.

129

Driver And Passenger

BeltAlert (If Equipped)

Seat Belt Warning Systems

The LED on dashboard trim turns on if

the driver or passenger's seat is

occupied and the seat belt is not

fastened with the ignition switched ON.

If the driver or passenger's seat belt is

unfastened (only when the passenger

seat is occupied) and the vehicle is

driven at a speed faster than about

12 MPH (20 km/h), the

LED flashes.

After a short time, the LED stops

flashing, but remains illuminated.

If a seat belt remains unfastened, the

LED flashes again for a given period of

time. In this case, fasten the seat belt.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

For optimum protection, the driver and

passenger seat belts are equipped with

pretensioner and load limiting systems.

For both these systems to work properly

you must wear the seat belt properly.

The seat belt pretensioners are

designed to deploy in moderate or

severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In

addition, during a side collision, the

pretensioner operates on the side in

which the collision occurs. The

pretensioners operate differently

depending on what types of air bags

are equipped. For details on the seat

belt pretensioner operation, refer to the

“SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”

paragraph in this chapter.

When a collision is detected, the

pretensioners deploy simultaneously

with the air bags. For deployment

details, refer to the “SRS Air Bag

Deployment Criteria” paragraph in this

chapter.

The seat belt retractors remove slack

quickly as the air bags are expanding.

Any time the air bags and seat belt

pretensioners have fired they must be

replaced.

With Passenger Occupant

Classification System

In addition, the pretensioner system for

the passenger, like the front and side

passenger Air Bag, is designed to only

deploy when the passenger occupant

classification sensor detects a

passenger sitting on the passenger's

seat.

Note:

These devices are not a substitute

for proper seat belt placement by the

occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by

the Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC). Like the air bags, the

pretensioners are single use items. A

deployed pretensioner or a deployed

air bag must be replaced immediately.

Load Limiter

The load limiting system releases belt

webbing in a controlled manner to

reduce belt force on the occupant's

chest.

While the most severe load on a seat

belt occurs in frontal collisions, the load

limiter has an automatic mechanical

function and can activate in any

accident mode with sufficient occupant

movement.

Even if the pretensioners have not fired,

the load limiting function must be

checked by an authorized dealer.

130

SAFETY

CHILD RESTRAINT

PRECAUTIONS

Child Restraints

FCA strongly urges the use of

child-restraint systems for children small

enough to use them.

Before buying any restraint system,

make sure that it has a label certifying

that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure

that you can install it in the vehicle

where you will use it.

Check your local and state or provincial

laws for specific requirements regarding

the safety of children riding in your

vehicle.

Whatever child-restraint system you

consider, please pick the appropriate

one for the age and size of the child,

obey the law and follow the instructions

that come with the individual

child-restraint system.

A child who has outgrown

child-restraint systems should use seat

belts, both lap and shoulder. If the

shoulder belt crosses the neck or face,

move the child closer to the center of

the vehicle.

A rear-facing child-restraint system

should NEVER be used on the

passenger seat with the Air Bag system

activated. In the event of an impact the

Air Bag activation may cause fatal

injuries to the transported child.

With Passenger Occupant

Classification System

To reduce the chance of injuries caused

by deployment of the passenger Air

Bag, the passenger occupant

classification sensor work as a part of

the supplementary restraint system.

This system deactivates the passenger

front and side Air Bags and also the

passenger seat belt pretensioner

system when the

OFF passenger Air

Bag deactivation indicator light

illuminates.

When an infant or small child sits on the

passenger seat, the system shuts off

the passenger front and side Air Bags

and seat belt pretensioner system, so

make sure the

OFF passenger Air

Bag deactivation indicator light

illuminates. For more details, refer to

"Passenger Occupant Classification

Sensor" in “Supplementary Restraint

System SRS — Air Bag” for additional

information.

Note: A seat belt or child-restraint

system can become very hot in a

closed vehicle during warm weather. To

avoid burning yourself or a child, check

them before you or your child touches

them.

Warning!

Improper installation can lead to failure

of an infant or child restraint. It could come

loose in a collision. The child could be

badly injured or killed. Follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in the

vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat

forward or rearward because it can loosen

the child restraint attachments. Remove

the child restraint before adjusting the

vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat

has been adjusted, reinstall the child

restraint.

When your child restraint is not in use,

secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or

LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the

vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.

In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike

the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

Child Restraint System

Types

In this Owner Handbook, explanation of

child restraint systems secured with

seat belts is provided for the following

three types of popular child-restraint

systems: infant seat, child seat, booster

seat.

131

Note:

Installation position is determined

by the type of child restraint system.

Always read the manufacturer's

instructions and this Owner Handbook

carefully.

Due to variations in the design of

child restraint systems, vehicle seats

and seat belts, not all child restraint

may fit all seating positions.

Before purchasing a child-restraint

system, it should be tested in the

specific vehicle seating position (or

positions) where it is intended to be

used. If a previously purchased

child-restraint system does not fit, you

may need to purchase a different one

that will.

Infant Seat

An infant seat provides restraint by

bracing the infant's head, neck and

back against the seating surface.

Child Seat

A child seat restrains a child's body

using the harness.

Booster Seat

A booster seat is a child restraint

accessory designed to improve the fit of

the seat belt system around the child's

body.

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt

under an arm or behind their back. In a

crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a

child properly, which may result in serious

injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the

seat belt correctly.

Child Seat Installation

Position

The passenger lap/shoulder belt can

easily be converted into the automatic

locking mode, which must be done to

hold the child-restraint system.

Note: To check if your seats have side

air bags: FCA vehicles equipped with

side air bag will have an embossed

"SRS AIRBAG" marking on the

outboard shoulder of the seats.

Follow the child restraint system

manufacturer's instructions carefully.

Depending on the type of child restraint

system, it may not employ seat belts

which are in automatic locking mode,

however if it uses an upper tether, it

may not be mounted properly in this

vehicle as there is no safe way to

anchor the tether. Confirm whether the

child restraint system can be used with

seat belts by reading the child restraint

system manufacturer's instructions.

06070809INF001

Infant Seat

03030202CHD001

Child Seat

03030202BOO001

Booster Seat

132

SAFETY

Passengers Seat Child Restraint

System Installation (With Passenger

Occupant Classification System)

Proceed as follows:

Make sure the ignition is switched

off.

Slide the seat as far back as

possible.

Place the child-restraint system on

the seat without putting your weight on

the seat and secure the child-restraint

system with the lap portion of the

lap/shoulder belt. See the

manufacturer's instructions on the

child-restraint system for belt routing

instructions.

To get the retractor into the

automatic locking mode, pull the

shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

until the entire length of the belt is out of

the retractor.

Push the child-restraint system firmly

into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt

retracts as snugly as possible. A

clicking noise from the retractor will be

heard during retraction if the system is

in automatic locking mode. If the belt

does not lock the seat down tight,

repeat the previous step and also this

one.

Seat your child safely in the

child-restraint system and secure the

child according to the instructions from

the child-restraint system manufacturer.

Note: Inspect this function before

each use of the child restraint system.

You should not be able to pull the

shoulder belt out of the retractor while

the system is in the automatic locking

mode. When you remove the

child-restraint system, be sure the belt

fully retracts to return the system to

emergency locking mode before

occupants use the seat belts.

Place the ignition in the ON position

and make sure the passenger air bag

deactivation indicator light illuminates

after installing a child restraint system

on the passenger seat. If the passenger

air bag deactivation indicator light does

not illuminate, remove the child restraint

system, place the ignition in the OFF

position, and then reinstall the child

restraint system.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying

passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can

cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a

rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

An incorrectly anchored tether strap

could lead to increased head motion and

possibly injury to the child. Use only the

anchorage position directly behind the child

seat to secure a child restraint top tether

strap.

06070400567567

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation

Light

133

SUPPLEMENTARY

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

SRS — AIR BAG

Description

The front and side Supplementary

Restraint Systems (SRS) include

different types of Air Bags.

Note: Please verify which kinds of Air

Bags are equipped on your vehicle by

locating the “SRS AIR BAG” location

indicators.

These indicators are visible in the area

where the Air Bags are installed.

The Air Bags are installed in the

following locations:

The steering wheel hub (Driver Air

Bag)

The passenger dashboard

(Passenger Air Bag)

The outer sides of the seat backs

(Side Air Bags)

This vehicle has front air bags and

lap/shoulder belts for both the driver

and front passenger. The front air bags

are a supplement to the seat belt

restraint systems.

The Air Bag supplementary restraint

systems are designed to provide

supplementary protection in certain

situations so seat belts are always

important in the following ways.

Without seat belt usage, the Air Bags

cannot provide adequate protection

during an accident. Seat belt usage is

necessary to:

Keep the occupant from being

thrown into an inflating Air Bag.

Reduce the possibility of injuries

during an accident that is not designed

for Air Bag inflation, such as roll-over or

rear impact.

Reduce the possibility of injuries in

frontal, near frontal or side collisions

that are not severe enough to activate

the Air Bags.

Reduce the possibility of being

thrown from your vehicle.

Reduce the possibility of injuries to

lower body and legs during an accident

because the Air Bags provide no

protection to these parts of the body.

Hold the driver in a position which

allows better control of the vehicle.

Warning!

In order for the Side Air Bags to work as

intended, do not install any accessory

items in your vehicle which could alter the

roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to

your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that

require permanent attachments (bolts or

screws) for installation on the vehicle roof.

Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for

any reason.

If your vehicle is also equipped with

a passenger occupant classification

system, refer to the “Passenger

Occupant Classification System”

paragraph for further information.

If your vehicle is equipped with a

passenger occupant classification

system, the passenger Air Bag

deactivation indicator light illuminates

for a specified time after the ignition has

been placed in the ON position.

Small children must be protected by a

child-restraint system as stipulated by

law in every state and province. In

certain states and provinces, larger

children must use a child-restraint

system. Carefully consider which

child-restraint system is necessary for

your child and follow the installation

directions in this Owner's Manual as

well as the child-restraint system

manufacturer's instructions.

06070400567567

Passenger Air Bag Deactivated

Light

134

SAFETY

Do not use a child-restraint system

which employs an upper tether

because there is no appropriate means

to anchor the tether.

Warning!

If the Indicator Light remains illuminated

for an adult passenger, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system

immediately. Failure to do so may cause

serious injury or death. If the Indicator Light

is illuminated with the words “PASS

AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of

a collision.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying

passenger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-facing

child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

Children 12 years or younger should

always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a

rear seat.

Warning!

Unapproved modifications or service

procedures to the passenger seat

assembly, its related components, seat

cover or cushion may inadvertently change

the air bag deployment in case of a frontal

collision. This could result in death or

serious injury to the front passenger if the

vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified

vehicle may not comply with required

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (CMVSS).

If it is necessary to modify the air bag

system for persons with disabilities, contact

your authorized dealer.

135

Supplementary Restraint System Components

With Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-121-002

With Passenger Occupant Classification System

1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators

And Air Bags

5 — Side Crash Sensors 9 — Passenger Occupant

Classification Sensor

2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic

Module (Sas Unit)

6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner

System Warning Light

10 — Passenger Occupant

Classification Module

3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags

4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 8 — Passenger Air Bag Deactivation

Indicator Light

136

SAFETY

Without Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-122-003

Without Passenger Occupant Classification System

1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators

And Air Bags

4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags

2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic

Module (Sas Unit)

5 — Side Crash Sensors

3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner

System Warning Light

137

How The SRS Air Bags

Work

This vehicle has front air bags and

lap/shoulder belts for both the driver

and front passenger. The front air bags

are a supplement to the seat belt

restraint systems. The SRS Air Bags are

designed to provide further protection

for passengers in addition to the seat

belt functions. Be sure to wear seat

belts properly.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belt pretensioners are

designed to deploy in moderate or

severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In

addition, during a side collision, the

pretensioner operates on the side in

which the collision occurs.

The pretensioners operate differently

depending on what types of air bags

are equipped. For details on the seat

belt pretensioner operation, refer to the

“SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”.

Driver Air Bag

The driver's air bag is mounted in the

steering wheel.

When Air Bag crash sensors detect a

frontal impact of greater than moderate

force, the driver's Air Bag inflates

quickly helping to reduce injury mainly

to the driver's head or chest caused by

directly hitting the steering wheel. For

more details about Air Bag deployment,

refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment

Criteria" in this chapter for further

information.

(With Passenger Occupant

Classification System)

The driver's dual-stage air bag controls

air bag inflation in two energy stages.

During an impact of moderate severity,

the driver's air bag deploys with lesser

energy, whereas during more severe

impacts, it deploys with more energy.

Passenger Air Bag

(Dual Stage)

The passenger Air Bag is mounted in

the passenger dashboard.

The inflation mechanism for the

passenger Air Bag is the same as the

driver's Air Bag, as mentioned above.

For more details about Air Bag

deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag

Deployment Criteria" in this chapter.

For further details about air bag

deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag

Deployment Criteria" in this chapter.

06010203-126-123

Driver Side Air Bags

06010204-126-123

Passenger Side Air Bag

138

SAFETY

Side Air Bags

The side air bags are mounted in the

outer sides of the seat backs. When the

air bag crash sensors detect a side

impact of greater than moderate force,

the system inflates the side air bag only

on the side in which the vehicle was hit.

The side air bag inflates quickly to

reduce injury to the driver or

passenger's head and chest caused by

directly hitting interior parts such as a

door or window. For more details about

air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air

Bag Deployment Criteria" in this

chapter for further information.

Warning!

Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to SABs can be

seriously injured or killed. Occupants,

including children, should never lean on or

sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the side air bags inflate, even if

they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where

appropriate) are necessary for your

protection in all collisions. They also help

keep you in position, away from an inflating

SAB. To get the best protection from the

SABs, occupants must wear their seat

belts properly and sit upright with their

backs against the seats. Children must be

properly restrained in a child restraint or

booster seat that is appropriate for the size

of the child.

With Passenger Occupant

Classification System

In addition, the passenger side bag is

designed to only deploy when the

passenger occupant classification

sensor detects a passenger sitting on

the passenger's seat.

Warning!

If a child restraint system, child, small

teenager or adult in the front passenger

seat is seated improperly, the occupant

may provide an output signal to the OCS

that is different from the occupant’s

properly seated weight input. This may

result in serious injury or death in a

collision.

Always wear your seat belt and sit

properly, with the seatback in an upright

position, your back against the seatback,

sitting upright, facing forward, in the center

of the seat, with your feet comfortably on

or near the floor.

Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,

backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the

front passenger seat. Holding an object

may provide an output signal to the OCS

that is different than the occupant’s

properly seated weight input, which may

result in serious injury or death in a

collision.

06010205-126-123

Side Air Bags

139

Placing an object on the floor under the

front passenger seat may prevent the OCS

from working properly, which may result in

serious injury or death in a collision. Do not

place any objects on the floor under the

front passenger seat.

Warning Light/Beep

A system malfunction or operation

conditions are indicated by a warning.

Refer to the beginning paragraph of

“Warning Lights And Messages” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your

instrument panel could mean you won’t

have the air bags to protect you in a

collision. If the light does not come on as a

bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if

it comes on as you drive, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

Passenger Side Front Air Bag And

Child Restraint Systems

Rearward-facing child restraint systems

must NEVER be fitted on the front seat

with an active passenger side air bag

since in the event of an impact the air

bag activation may cause fatal injuries

to the transported child.

ALWAYS comply with the instructions

on the label stuck on the passenger

side sun visor : A = Mexico market/ B =

U.S.A. and Canada market.

Warning!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place

objects between you and the Side Air

Bags; the performance could be adversely

affected and/or objects could be pushed

into you, causing serious injury.

Warning!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do

not lean against the door or window. Sit

upright in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bags

during deployment could cause you to be

severely injured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could

lead to more severe injuries in a collision.

The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt

to restrain you properly. In some collisions,

Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always

wear your seat belt even though you have

Side Air Bags.

03030101-121-001

Sun Visor Air Bag Labels

140

SAFETY

SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria

This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision (the illustrations are the

representative cases of collisions).

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt

pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant

Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

SRS Equipment

Types Of Collision

A Severe Frontal/Near

Frontal Collision

A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision

SRS Equipment

141

SRS Equipment

Types Of Collision

A Severe Frontal/Near

Frontal Collision

A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision

Seat Belt Pretensioner X (**) (Both Sides) X (**) (Impact Side Only)

air bag and seat belt

pretensioner will be activated in

a rear collision

Driver Air Bag X

Passenger Air Bag X (**)

Side Air Bag X (**) (Impact Side Only)

X: the SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.

(*) In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side air bags deploy (only on the side in which the collision occurs).

(**) Passenger Occupant Classification System: the passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are

designed to deploy when the passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the passenger's seat.

Note: In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy depending on the direction, angle,

and rate of impact.

Warning!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover, or cushion may

inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if

the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).

If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

142

SAFETY

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat

belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light

does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have

an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the occupant classification sensor from working properly, which

may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.

If there is a fault present in the occupant classification sensor, both the Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show

that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated

until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

143

Limitations To SRS Air

Bag

In severe collisions such as those

described in "SRS Air Bag Deployment

Criteria" paragraph, the applicable SRS

air bag equipment will deploy.

However, in some accidents, the

equipment may not deploy depending

on the type of collision and its severity.

Limitations To Front / Near Front

Collision Detection

Front/near front collisions may not be

detected as severe enough to deploy

the SRS air bag equipment:

Impacts involving trees or poles A.

Frontal offset impact to the vehicle B.

Rear-ending or running under a

truck's tail gate.

03040600-121-001

Front/Near Front Collision

03040600-122-001

Rear End Collision

144

SAFETY

Limitations To Side Collision

Detection

Side collisions may not be detected as

severe enough to deploy the SRS air

bag equipment:

Side impacts involving trees or poles A.

Side impacts with two-wheeled

vehicles B.

Roll-over.

Passenger Occupant

Classification Sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with a

passenger occupant classification

sensor as a part of the supplementary

restraint system. This sensor is

equipped in the passenger's seat

cushion. This sensor measures the

electrostatic capacity of the

passenger's seat.

The SRS unit is designed to prevent the

passenger front and side Air Bags and

seat belt pretensioner system from

deploying if the passenger Air Bag

deactivation indicator light turns on.

To reduce the chance of injuries caused

by deployment of the passenger Air

Bag, the system deactivates the

passenger front and side Air Bags and

also the seat belt pretensioner system

when the passenger Air Bag

deactivation indicator light turns on.

This system shuts off the passenger

front and side Air Bags and seat belt

pretensioner system, so make sure the

passenger Air Bag deactivation

indicator light turns on.

The air bag/seat belt pretensioner

system warning light flashes and the

passenger Air Bag deactivation

indicator light illuminates if the sensors

have a possible malfunction. If this

happens, the passenger front and side

Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner

system will not deploy.

Note: If a passenger is seated as

shown in the following figure the

passenger occupant classification

sensor cannot detect a passenger

sitting on the passenger's seat correctly

and the deployment/non-deployment of

the Air Bags cannot be controlled as

indicated in the passenger Air Bag

deactivation indicator light on/off

condition chart.

Warning!

If a child restraint system, child, small

teenager or adult in the front passenger

seat is seated improperly, the occupant

may provide an output signal to the

occupant classification sensor that is

different from the occupant’s properly

seated weight input. This may result in

serious injury or death in a collision.

03040600-123-001

Side Collision

03040600-124-002

Roll-Over Collision

145

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in

your instrument panel could mean you

won’t have the air bags to protect you in a

collision. If the light does not come on as a

bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if

it comes on as you drive, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

Placing an object on the floor under the

front passenger seat may prevent the

occupant classification sensor from

working properly, which may result in

serious injury or death in a collision. Do not

place any objects on the floor under the

front passenger seat.

If there is a fault present in the occupant

classification sensor, both the Indicator

Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will

illuminate to show that the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.

Should this occur, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag will remain

deactivated until the fault is cleared. This

indicates that you should take the vehicle

to an authorized dealer for service

immediately.

Warning!

Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,

backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the

front passenger seat. Holding an object

may provide an output signal to the

occupant classification sensor that is

different than the occupant’s properly

seated weight input, which may result in

serious injury or death in a collision.

03040702-12A-001

Passenger Not Sitting Correct

146

SAFETY

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation

Indicator Lights

These indicator lights turn on to remind

you that the passenger front and side

Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner will

or will not deploy during a collision.

Warning!

If the Indicator Light remains illuminated

for an adult passenger, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system

immediately. Failure to do so may cause

serious injury or death. If the Indicator Light

is illuminated with the words “PASS

AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of

a collision.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying

passenger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-facing

child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

Children 12 years or younger should

always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a

rear seat.

Note:

The system requires about

10 seconds to alternate between

turning the passenger front and side

Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner

system on or off.

The passenger air bag deactivation

indicator light may turn on repeatedly if

luggage or other items are put on the

passenger seat, or if the temperature

of the vehicle's interior changes

suddenly.

The passenger air bag deactivation

indicator light may turn on for

10 seconds if the electrostatic capacity

on the passenger seat changes.

The air bag/seat belt pretensioner

system warning light might turn on if

the passenger seat receives a severe

impact.

If the passenger Air Bag

deactivation indicator light does not

turn on after installing a child restraint

system on the passenger seat, first,

reinstall your child restraint system

according to the procedure in this

Owner Handbook. Then, if the

passenger Air Bag deactivation OFF

indicator light still does not turn on,

contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

If the passenger Air Bag

deactivation indicator light turns on

when an occupant is seated directly in

the passenger seat, have the

passenger readjust their posture by

sitting with their feet on the floor, and

then refastening the seat belt. If the

passenger Air Bag deactivation

indicator light remains turned on, slide

the passenger seat as far back as

possible. Contact an authorized dealer

as soon as possible.

06070400567567

Passenger Air Bag Deactivated

147

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light On/Off Condition Chart

If the passenger occupant classification sensor is normal, the indicator light turns on when the ignition is switched ON. The light

turns off after a few seconds. Then, the indicator light turns on or is off under the following conditions:

Condition Detected By The

Passenger Occupant

Classification System

Passenger Air Bag

Deactivation Indicator Light

Passenger Front

And Side Air Bags

Passenger Seat Belt

Pretensioner System

Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated

child is seated in a child

restraint system (*)

On Deactivated Deactivated

Adult (**) Off Ready Ready

(*) The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child restraint system, or a junior seat

depending on the child's physical size and seated posture.

(**) If a smaller adult sits on the passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on the

person's physique.

If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON and does not turn on as

indicated in the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the

passenger seat and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

148

SAFETY

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a

child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Warning!

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause

harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be

injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the

air bags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly.

In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

149

Maintaining Your Air Bag

System

Warning!

Modifications to any part of the air bag

system could cause it to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air bag

system is not there to protect you. Do not

modify the components or wiring, including

adding any kind of badges or stickers to

the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do

not modify the front bumper, vehicle body

structure, or add aftermarket side steps or

running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part

of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to

tell anyone who works on your vehicle that

it has an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part of

your air bag system. The air bag may inflate

accidentally or may not function properly if

modifications are made. Take your vehicle

to an authorized dealer for any air bag

system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be

serviced in any way (including removal or

loosening/tightening of seat attachment

bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized

dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat

accessories may be used. If it is necessary

to modify the air bag system for persons

with disabilities, contact your authorized

dealer.

EVENT DATA

RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle,

data that will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety

systems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle

were operating.

Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened.

How far (if at all) the driver was

pushing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal.

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

Note:

EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near

crash-like situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal

driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded. However,

other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally

identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if

they have access to the vehicle or the

EDR.FCA will not disclose any of the

data recorded in an EDR to a third party

unless:

A written agreement from the

vehicle owner or the lessee is

obtained.

Officially requested by the police or

other law enforcement authorities.

Used as a defense for FCA in a law

suit, claim, or arbitration.

150

SAFETY

Ordered by a judge or court.

However, if necessary, FCA will:

Use the data for research on FCA

vehicle performance, including safety.

Disclose the data or the

summarized data to a third party for

research purposes without disclosing

vehicle or owner identification

information.

Recording Of Vehicle Data

This vehicle is equipped with a

computer which records the following

main vehicle data related to vehicle

controls, operation, and other driving

conditions.

Recorded Data

Vehicle conditions such as engine

speed and vehicle speed.

Driving operation conditions such

as accelerator and brake pedals, and

information related to the

environmental circumstances while the

vehicle is driven.

Malfunction diagnosis information

from each on-vehicle computer.

Information related to controls of

other on-vehicle computers.

The recorded data may vary depending

on the vehicle grade and optional

equipment. Voice and images are not

recorded.

Data Handling

FCA and its subcontracting parties may

obtain and use the recorded data for

vehicle malfunction diagnosis, research

and development, and quality

improvement.

FCA will not disclose or provide any of

the obtained data to a third party

unless:

An agreement from the vehicle

owner (agreements from lessor and

lessee for leased vehicle) is obtained.

Officially requested by the police or

other law enforcement authorities.

For statistical processing by a

research institution, after processing

the data so that identification of the

owner or the vehicle is impossible.

CONSTANT

MONITORING

The following components of the Air

Bag systems are monitored by a

diagnostic system:

Crash Sensors, And Diagnostic

Module (Sas Unit)

Front Air Bag Sensors

Air Bag Modules

Side Crash Sensors

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner

System Warning Light

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Related Wiring

With Passenger Occupant

Classification System

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation

Indicator Light

Passenger Occupant Classification

Sensor

Passenger Occupant Classification

Module — If Equipped

The diagnostic module continuously

monitors the system's readiness. This

begins when the ignition is switched

ON and continues while the vehicle is

being driven.

151

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTINGTHEENGINE .......153

BRAKE SYSTEM ............154

MANUAL TRANSMISSION ......154

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —

IF EQUIPPED ..............155

SPORT MODE .............160

SPEED CONTROL ...........160

RADAR SENSORS —

IF EQUIPPED ..............163

REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED ..............164

PARKVIEW REAR BACKUP

CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED ......166

REFUELING THE VEHICLE ......173

VEHICLELOADING ..........176

TOWING TRAILERS ..........178

DRIVING TIPS ..............178

152

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE

ENGINE

Starting The Engine

Before starting the engine, adjust the

seat, the interior rear view mirrors, and

the door mirrors, and fasten the seat

belt correctly.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake,

brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children, and do not leave the ignition of a

vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless

Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child

could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat

build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Never press the accelerator pedal for

starting the engine.

Models Equipped With A

Manual Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Engage the parking brake and place

the gear selector in NEUTRAL.

2. Place the start button in the ACC

mode.

3. Fully depress the clutch pedal

without touching the accelerator.

4. Place the start button in the ON

mode, push and release it as soon as

the engine starts. If the engine does not

start within 10 seconds, push the start

button to OFF mode and wait for

10-15 seconds before repeating the

starting procedure.

Models Equipped With

An Automatic

Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Engage the parking brake and place

the gear selector to P (PARK) or N

(NEUTRAL).

2. Fully depress the brake pedal

without touching the accelerator.

3. Place the start button in the ACC

mode.

4. Place the start button in the ON

mode, push and release it as soon as

the engine starts. If the engine does not

start within 10 seconds, push the start

button to OFF mode and wait for

10-15 seconds before repeating the

starting procedure.

Cold Weather Operation

Regarding Cold Start Disable

When the ambient temperature is

extremely low, the engine may not

crank even when the engine starting

procedure is performed. At this time,

the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in

the instrument cluster flashes. However,

this does not indicate a problem.

Perform the necessary procedures (see

“Warning lights And Messages”

paragraph in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” chapter).

Regarding Ice Breaker

When the ambient temperature is low,

the start of cranking may be delayed

after engine starting procedure is

performed. At this time, the Cold Start

Disable Indicator light in the instrument

cluster illumintes. However, this does

not indicate a problem.

Refer to your authorized dealer

regarding other related parts which are

to be input such as function name,

operating scenario (condition) of each

function, indicator operation, and user

operation/procedure information.

153

Extended Park Starting

Note: Extended Park condition occurs

when the vehicle has not been started

or driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper

cables to the battery to ensure a full

battery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Place the ignition in the START

mode and release it when the engine

starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within

10 seconds, place the ignition in the

STOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, wait five

seconds to allow the starter to cool,

then repeat the Extended Park Starting

procedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eight

attempts, allow the starter to cool for at

least 10 minutes, then repeat the

procedure.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not

crank continuously for more than 10 seconds

at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before

trying again.

After Starting —

Warming Up The Engine

Proceed as follows:

1. Travel slowly, letting the engine run

at a reduced RPM, without accelerating

suddenly.

2. It is recommended to wait until the

digital engine coolant temperature

indicator starts moving before

demanding full performance.

Stopping The Engine

Proceed as follows:

1. Park the car in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic, if

equipped with manual transmission

place gear selector in FIRST (1st) or

REVERSE (R) gear, if equipped with

automatic transmission place the gear

selector to PARK (P).

2. Push and release the ignition button

to STOP the engine.

BRAKE SYSTEM

This vehicle has power-assisted brakes

that adjust automatically through

normal use. Should power-assist fail,

you can stop by applying greater force

than normal to the brake pedal. But the

distance required to stop will be greater

than usual.

Note: Always depress the brake pedal

with the right foot. Applying the brakes

with the unaccustomed left foot could

slow your reaction time to an

emergency situation resulting in

insufficient braking operation.

Do not drive with your foot held on the

clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold the

clutch pedal depressed halfway

unnecessarily. Doing so could result in

the following:

The clutch and brake parts will wear

out more quickly.

The brakes can overheat and

adversely affect brake performance.

Warning!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake

failure and possibly a collision. Driving with

your foot resting or riding on the brake

pedal can result in abnormally high brake

temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not

have your full braking capacity in an

emergency.

154

STARTING AND OPERATING

Driving a vehicle with the “Brake

Warning Light” on is dangerous. A

significant decrease in braking performance

or vehicle stability during braking may

occur. It will take you longer to stop the

vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to

control. You could have a collision. Have

the vehicle checked immediately.

Caution!

Wear shoes appropriate for driving in order

to avoid your shoe contacting the brake

pedal when depressing the accelerator

pedal.

Parking Brake

Note: Driving with the parking brake on

will cause excessive wear of the brake

parts.

Warning!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the park brake,

brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle or in a location accessible to

children. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fully

disengaged before driving; failure to do so

can lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake when

leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and

cause damage or injury. Also be certain to

leave a manual transmission in REVERSE

(R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to do so may

allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage

or injury.

Setting the Parking Brake

Depress the brake pedal and then firmly

pull the parking brake lever fully

upwards with sufficient force to hold the

vehicle in a stationary position.

Releasing the Parking Brake

Depress the brake pedal and pull the

parking brake lever upwards, then

press the release button. While holding

the button, lower the parking brake

lever all the way down to the released

position.

Warning Light

The warning light turns on when the

system has a malfunction. Refer to

“Warning Lights And Messages” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Brake Pad Wear Indicator

When the disc brake pads become

worn, the built-in wear indicators

contact the rotors. This causes a

screeching noise to warn that the pads

should be replaced. When you hear this

noise contact your authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

05050102-12A-001AB

Parking Brake

1 — Parking Brake Lever

2 — Parking Brake Release Button

155

Brake Assist

During emergency braking situations

when it is necessary to depress the

brake pedal with greater force, the

brake assist system provides braking

assistance, thus enhancing braking

performance. When the brake pedal is

depressed hard or depressed more

quickly, the brakes apply more firmly.

Note:

When the brake pedal is depressed

hard or depressed more quickly, the

pedal will feel softer but the brakes will

apply more firmly. This is a normal

effect of the brake assist operation and

does not indicate a malfunction.

When the brake pedal is depressed

hard or depressed more quickly, a

motor/pump operation noise may be

heard. This is a normal effect of the

brake assist and does not indicate a

malfunction.

The brake assist equipment does

not supersede the functionality of the

vehicle's main braking system.

MANUAL

TRANSMISSION

Manual Transmission

Warning!

You or others could be injured if you leave

the vehicle unattended without having the

park brake fully applied. The park brake

should always be applied when the driver

is not in the vehicle, especially on an

incline.

Caution!

Never drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle

on a hill with the clutch pedal partially

engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear

on the clutch.

To engage the gears, press the clutch

pedal fully and put the gear selector

into the required position. The diagram

for gear engagement is shown on the

knob.

Depress the clutch pedal all the way

down while shifting, then release it

slowly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a device

to prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) by

mistake. Push the gear selector

downward and shift to REVERSE (R).

A natural driving posture can be

achieved by lightly gripping the gear

selector from the side without having to

rest your elbow on the center console.

If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult,

shift back into neutral, release the

clutch pedal, and try again.

05987654-12A-001AB

Gear Selector

156

STARTING AND OPERATING

With Parking Sensor System

When the gear selector is shifted to the

REVERSE (R) position with the ignition

placed in the ON mode, the parking

sensor system is activated an audible

sound is heard.

Caution!

Keep your foot off the clutch pedal

except when shifting gears. Also, do not

use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an hill

or grade. Riding the clutch will cause

needless clutch wear and damage.

Do not apply any excessive lateral force

to the gear selector when changing from

fifth to fourth gear. This could lead to the

accidental selection of second gear, which

could result in damage to the transmission.

Make sure the vehicle comes to a

complete stop before shifting to REVERSE

(R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the

vehicle is still moving may damage the

transmission.

Reverse can only be engaged when the

vehicle is completely stationary. With the

engine running, wait at least two seconds

with the clutch pedal fully pressed before

engaging reverse to prevent damage to the

gears.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION —

IF EQUIPPED

Shift Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with an

interlock system that holds the

transmission gear selector in PARK (P)

unless the brakes are applied. To shift

the transmission out of PARK (P), the

ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN

mode (engine running or not) and the

brake pedal must be pressed.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher

than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly

pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.

You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear

when the engine is idling normally and your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle

could injure those in or near the vehicle. As

with all vehicles, you should never exit a

vehicle while the engine is running. Before

exiting a vehicle, always apply the park

brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition

is in the OFF mode, the transmission is

locked in PARK, securing the vehicle

against unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake,

brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in

the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur if

the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE

only after the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is

above idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure

your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

157

The gear selector must be in PARK (P)

or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter.

The transmission gear selector has

PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N),

DRIVE (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shift

positions.

The transmission may be shifted freely

from REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), to

DRIVE (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–).

Note: Even if you intend to use the

automatic transmission functions as a

traditional automatic, you should also

be aware that you can inadvertently

shift into manual shift mode and an

inappropriate gear may be retained as

the vehicle speed increases. If you

notice the engine speed going higher or

hear the engine racing, confirm you

have not accidentally slipped into

manual shift mode (refer to “Manual

Shift Mode” paragraph in this section).

Shift Position Indication

The gear selector position (PRNDM) is

illuminated when the ignition is placed

in the ON mode.

Note: If one of the following actions is

performed, the gear selector position is

displayed for five minutes even if the

ignition is placed in a mode other than

ON.

The ignition is placed in the OFF

mode.

The driver's door is opened.

Gear Position Indication

In MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” of

the shift position indication illuminates

and the number of the selected gear is

displayed.

Gear Selector Positions

PARK (P)

PARK (P) locks the transmission and

prevents the driveshaft from rotating.

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as a

substitute for the park brake. Always apply

the park brake fully when parked to guard

against vehicle movement and possible injury

or damage.

Your vehicle could move and injure you

and others if it is not in PARK. Check by

trying to move the gear selector out of PARK

with the brake pedal released. Make sure the

transmission is in PARK before leaving the

vehicle.

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing

the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate

quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or

something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle could

injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all

vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle

while the engine is running. Before exiting a

vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift the

transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition

OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode,

the transmission is locked in PARK, securing

the vehicle against unwanted movement.

05210200-LHD12AT-001AB

Gear Selector And Pattern

158

STARTING AND OPERATING

When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the park brake,

brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition in

the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or

move the vehicle.

Caution!

Before moving the transmission gear

selector out of PARK, you must place the

ignition from the LOCK/OFF mode to the

ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake

pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear

selector could result.

DO NOT race the engine when shifting

from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear

range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

Note:

Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N)

or REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is

moving can damage your transmission.

Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE

(R) when the engine is running faster

than idle can damage the

transmission.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle

backward. Shift into REVERSE only

after the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

With Parking Sensor system: when

the gear selector is shifted to the

REVERSE (R) position with the ignition

placed in the ON mode, the parking

sensor system is activated and an

audible sound is heard.

NEUTRAL (N)

In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels and

transmission are not locked. The vehicle

will roll freely even on the slightest

incline unless the parking brake or

brakes are applied.

Warning!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn

off the ignition to coast down a hill. These

are unsafe practices that limit your

response to changing traffic or road

conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

Note: Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N)

when driving the vehicle. Doing so will

damage the transmission. Press the

parking brake or depress the brake

pedal before moving the gear selector

from NEUTRAL (N) to prevent the

vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

DRIVE (D)

DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position.

From a stop, the transmission will

automatically shift through all available

gears.

MANUAL (M)

MANUAL (M) is the manual shift mode

position. Gears can be shifted up or

down by operating the gear selector.

(Refer to “Manual Shift Mode”

paragraph in this section).

159

Warning!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking on a slippery surface. The drive

wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle

could skid, causing a collision or personal

injury.

Active Adaptive Shift

(AAS)

Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)

automatically controls the transmission

shift points to best suit the road

conditions and driver input. This

improves driving feel.

The transmission may switch to AAS

mode when driving up and down

slopes, cornering, driving at high

elevations, or depressing the

accelerator pedal quickly while the gear

selector is in the DRIVE (D) position.

Depending on the road and driving

conditions/vehicle operations, gear

shifting could be delayed or not occur,

however, this does not indicate a

problem because the AAS mode will

maintain the optimum gear position.

Shift-Lock System

The shift-lock system prevents shifting

out of PARK (P) unless the brake pedal

is depressed.

To shift from PARK (P):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN

mode.

3. Press and hold the lock-release

button on the gear selector.

4. Move the gear selector.

When the ignition is in the ACC or OFF

mode, the gear selector cannot be

shifted from PARK (P).

The ignition cannot be placed in the

OFF mode if the gear selector is not in

PARK (P).

Shift Lock Override

If the gear selector will not move from

PARK (P) using the proper shift

procedure, continue to press the brake

pedal and proceed as follows:

1. Remove the shift lock override cover

using a cloth wrapped flat head

screwdriver.

2. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool

into the Override Access Hole, and

push the override button down.

3. Push and hold the lock release

button on the gear selector and move

the gear selector.

4. Take the vehicle to an authorized

dealer.

05210206-12A-002

Shift Lock Override Access Hole

160

STARTING AND OPERATING

For Some Models

Proceed as follows:

1. Push the lock release button on the

gear selector while also pushing down

on the Shift Lock Override button.

2. Move the gear selector.

3. Take the vehicle to an authorized

dealer.

Manual Shift Mode

The manual shift mode gives you the

feel of driving a manual transmission

vehicle by allowing you to operate the

gear selector manually.

This allows you to control engine rpm

and torque to the drive wheels much

like a manual transmission when more

control is desired.

To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode,

shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to

MANUAL (M). To return to automatic

shift mode, shift the gear selector from

MANUAL (M) to DRIVE (D).

You can shift between DRIVE (D) and

MANUAL (M) mode at any time, without

taking your foot off the accelerator.

Note:

If you change to manual shift mode

when the vehicle is stopped, the gear

will shift to M1.

If you change to manual shift mode

while the vehicle is moving it will remain

in the current gear until a manual shift

request is made.

Indicators

Manual Shift Mode Indication

In manual shift mode, the “M” of the

shift position indication in the

instrument panel illuminates.

Gear Position Indication

The numeral for the selected gear

illuminates.

005210206-122-001

Shift Lock Override

05210207-12A-002AB

Instrument Panel

1 — Manual Shift Mode Indication

2 — Gear Position Indication

161

Manually Shifting Up/Down

To shift up to a higher gear, tap the

gear selector rearward once (or tap the

[+] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if

equipped).

To shift down toalowergear,tapthe

gear selector forward once (or tap the

[-] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if

equipped).

Note:

If a requested downshift would

cause the engine to over-speed, that

shift will not occur.

The system will ignore attempts to

upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

Do not drive the vehicle with the

tachometer needle in the red zone

while in manual shift mode.

During deceleration, the

transmission may automatically shift

down depending on vehicle speed.

You can start out, from a stop, in

first or second gear. Tapping the gear

selector rearward (+) (at a stop) will

allow starting in second gear. Starting

out in second gear can be helpful in

snowy or icy conditions.

Paddle Mode —

If Equipped

Tapping one of the steering

wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if

equipped, while the gear selector is in

DRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a

temporary manual mode). The current

gear will be displayed in the instrument

cluster, with the "M" also illuminated.

The transmission will revert back to

normal operation (if the gear selector

remains in DRIVE) after a period of time,

depending on accelerator pedal activity.

Note: Because Paddle mode is only

temporary, use of the MANUAL (M)

position is recommended if you need to

drive the vehicle in a particular gear for

long periods.

Driving Tips

Overtaking

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing steep grades, press

the accelerator fully. The transmission

will shift to a lower gear, depending on

vehicle speed.

Note:

The accelerator pedal may initially

feel heavy as it is being pressed, then

feel lighter as it is pressed further. This

change in pedal force controls whether

or not kickdown should be performed.

While the gear selector is in the

MANUAL (M) position and the Dynamic

Stability Control (DSC) is turned off,

manual shift mode does not switch to

automatic shift mode even if the

accelerator pedal is completely

pressed. Tap the gear selector forward

or rearward to select the appropriate

gear.

Climbing steep grades from a stop

To climb a steep grade from a stopped

position:

1. Press the brake pedal.

2. Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, depending

on the load weight and grade

steepness.

3. Release the brake pedal while

gradually accelerating.

Descending steep grades

When descending a steep grade, shift

to lower gears, depending on load

weight and grade steepness.

Descend slowly, using the brakes only

occasionally to prevent them from

overheating.

162

STARTING AND OPERATING

SPORT MODE

The Sport mode increases steering

feedback to the driver with slight

increase in effort and changes the

transmission shift schedules for more

aggressive shifting. This driving mode is

useful while driving on twisty roads

where more steering precision is

desired in spirited cornering.

To activate Sport mode, toggle the

Sport Mode button forward and hold for

approximately 2 seconds. You will see

“Sport” illuminate in the Instrument

Panel cluster.

SPEED CONTROL

Speed Control

This is an electronically controlled

driving assistance feature that allows

the desired vehicle speed to be

maintained, without having to press the

accelerator pedal.

This feature can be used at a speed

above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long

stretches of dry, straight roads with few

variations (e.g. motorways).

It is therefore not recommended to use

this feature on city roads with traffic. Do

not use it in town.

Warning!

Do not use Speed Control under the

following conditions:

hilly terrain

steep inclines

heavy or unsteady traffic

slippery or winding roads

similar restrictions that require

inconsistent speed

Using the Speed Control under the

following conditions is dangerous and

could result in loss of vehicle control.

Activation / Deactivation

Note:

When the ignition is placed in the

OFF position, the system status before it

was turned off is stored. For example, if

the ignition is placed in the OFF position

while the Speed Control is operating, the

system will be operable when the ignition

is placed in the ON position the next time.

Activating Speed Control

Push the ON button located on the right

side of the steering wheel with the other

Speed Control buttons. The warning light

(amber) in the instrument cluster will

illuminate.

05210101-12A-001AB

SPORT Button

05100101-877-877AB

Speed Control Buttons

163

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could

accidentally set the system or cause it to

go faster than you want. You could lose

control and have an accident. Always leave

the system off when you are not using it.

Deactivating Speed Control

Push the OFF/CAN button. The

warning light (amber) in the

instrument cluster turns off.

When a speed has been set:the

warning light (green) in the

instrument cluster is illuminated, push

and hold the OFF/CAN button or push

the OFF/CAN button twice to

deactivate.

When a speed has not been set:the

warning light (amber) in the

instrument cluster is illuminated, push

the OFF/CAN button to deactivate.

Setting A Desired Speed

Proceed as follows:

1. Activate the Speed Control device

by pushing the ON button. The cruise

warning light (amber) illuminates.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,

which must be more than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

3. Set the Speed Control by pushing

the SET (-) button at the desired speed.

The Speed Control is set at the

moment the SET (-) button is pushed.

Release the accelerator pedal

simultaneously. The

warning light

(green) illuminates.

Note: The Speed Control setting

cannot be performed under the

following conditions:

Automatic transmission: the gear

selector is in the PARK or NEUTRAL

position.

Manual transmission: the gear

selector is in the NEUTRAL position or

when the clutch is disengaged (clutch

is depressed).

The parking brake is applied.

Release the SET (-) button at the

desired speed, otherwise the speed will

continue decreasing while the SET (-)

button is pushed and held (except

when the accelerator pedal is

depressed).

Note:

Release the SET (-) button at the

desired speed, otherwise the speed

will continue decreasing while the SET

(-) button is pushed and held (except

when the accelerator pedal is

depressed).

On a steep grade, the vehicle may

momentarily slow down while

ascending, or speed up while

descending.

The Speed Control will cancel if the

vehicle speed decreases below

16 mph (25 km/h) when climbing a

steep incline.

The Speed Control may cancel at

about 9 mph (15 km/h) below the

preset speed such as when climbing a

long, steep incline.

The vehicle’s set speed is displayed in

the instrument cluster.

Increasing Speed

To increase speed using the Speed

Control buttons:

Push the RES (+) button and hold it,

your vehicle will accelerate. Release the

button at the desired speed.

Push the RES (+) button and release

it immediately, to adjust the set speed.

Multiple pushes of the button will

increase the set speed according to the

number of times it is pushed.

164

STARTING AND OPERATING

Increasing speed with a single RES

(+) button operation:

If the instrument cluster display for

vehicle speed is indicated in mph:

speed will increase in 1 mph

increments.

If the instrument cluster display for

vehicle speed is indicated in km/h:

speed will increase in 1 km/h

increments.

To increase speed using

accelerator pedal:

Press the accelerator pedal to

accelerate to the desired speed.

Push the SET (-) button and release it

immediately. This new set speed will be

saved.

Note: Accelerate the vehicle to speed

up temporarily with the accelerator

pedal when the Speed Control is on.

Increasing the speed will not interfere

with, or change the set speed. Take

your foot off the accelerator to return to

the set speed.

Decreasing Speed

To decrease speed using the Speed

Control buttons:

Push the SET (-) button and hold it,

the vehicle will gradually slow down.

Release the button at the desired

speed.

Push the SET (-) button and release

it immediately to adjust the set speed.

Multiple button pushes will decrease

the set speed according to the number

of times it is pushed.

Decreasing speed with a single SET

(-) button operation:

If the instrument cluster display for

vehicle speed is indicated in mph: the

speed will decrease in 1 mph

increments.

If the instrument cluster display for

vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: the

speed will decrease in 1 km/h

increments.

Resume Speed

If any other method besides the

OFF/CAN button was used to cancel

cruising speed (such as applying the

brake pedal or pressing in the clutch

pedal) and the system is still activated,

the most recent set speed will

automatically resume when the RES (+)

button is pushed.

If vehicle speed is below 25 mph

(40 km/h), increase the vehicle speed

up to 16 mph (25 km/h) or more and

push RES (+) button.

Temporarily Canceling

The System

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could

accidentally set the system or cause it to

go faster than you want. You could lose

control and have an accident. Always leave

the system OFF when you are not using it.

To temporarily cancel the system, use

one of these methods:

Slightly press the brake pedal.

Press the clutch pedal (if equipped

with a manual transmission).

Push OFF/CAN button.

If the RES (+) button is pushed when

the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h)

or higher, the system reverts to the

previously set speed.

165

Note: If any of the following conditions

occur, the Speed Control system is

temporarily canceled:

The parking brake is applied.

Automatic Transmission: the

gear selector is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position.

Manual Transmission: the gear

selector is in the NEUTRAL position.

Automatic Transmission: the

Speed Control cannot be canceled

while driving in manual mode (gear

selector shifted from D to M position).

Therefore, engine braking will not be

applied even if the transmission is

shifted down to a lower gear. If

deceleration is required, lower the set

speed or press the brake pedal.

When the Speed Control system is

temporarily canceled, the speed cannot

be reset.

RADAR SENSORS —

IF EQUIPPED

Rear Radar Sensors

The following systems use the rear

radar sensors:

Blind Spot Monitoring System (BSM)

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

The radar sensors function by detecting

the radio waves reflected off of a vehicle

approaching from the rear, or an

obstruction, sent from the radar sensor.

The radar sensors are installed inside

the rear bumper, one each on the left

and right sides.

Always keep the surface of the rear

bumper near the radar sensors clean so

that the radar sensors operate normally.

Also, do not apply items such as

stickers.

Caution!

If the rear bumper receives a severe

impact, the system may no longer operate

normally. Stop the system immediately and

contact an authorized dealer.

The detection ability of the radar

sensors has limitations. In the following

cases, the detection ability may be

decreased, and the system may not

operate normally:

The rear bumper near the radar

sensors has been damaged.

Snow, ice or mud has adhered to the

radar sensors on the rear bumper.

Operating in weather conditions such

as rain, snow and fog.

Note: Under the following conditions,

the radar sensors cannot detect objects

or it may be difficult to detect them:

Stationary objects on a road or a

road side such as small, two-wheeled

vehicles, bicycles, pedestrians,

animals, and shopping carts.

07080915112112

Radar Sensor Locations

166

STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicle shapes which do not reflect

radar waves well such as empty trailers

with a low vehicle height and sports

cars.

Vehicles are shipped with the direction

of the radar sensors adjusted for each

vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so

that the radar sensors detect

approaching vehicles correctly. If the

direction of the radar sensors has

changed, contact an authorized dealer.

The radar sensors are regulated by the

relevant radio wave laws of the country

in which the vehicle is driven. If the

vehicle is driven abroad, authorization

from the country in which the vehicle is

driven may be required.

Note:

For repairs or replacement of the

radar sensors, bumper repairs, paint

work, or replacement near the radar

sensors, consult an authorized dealer.

Turn off the radar system when

pulling a trailer or while an accessory,

such as a bicycle carrier, is installed to

the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the

radio waves emitted by the radar will

be blocked causing the system to not

operate normally.

REAR PARK ASSIST

— IF EQUIPPED

Rear Park Assist

Warning!

Do not rely completely on the parking

sensor system and be sure to confirm the

safety around your vehicle visually when

driving. This system can assist the driver in

operating the vehicle in the forward and

backward directions while parking. The

detection ranges of the sensors are limited,

therefore, driving the vehicle while relying

only on the system may cause an accident.

Always confirm the safety around your

vehicle visually when driving.

Parking and other potentially dangerous

maneuvers are, however, always the

driver’s responsibility. When performing

these operations, always make sure that

there are no other people (especially

children) or animals on the route you want

to drive into. The parking sensors are an

aid for the driver, but the driver must never

allow their attention to lapse during

potentially dangerous maneuvers, even

those executed at low speeds.

The Rear Park Assist System uses four

ultrasonic sensors (two rear sensors

and two rear corner sensors) to detect

obstructions around the vehicle while

parking the vehicle in a garage or

during parallel parking when the gear

selector is in REVERSE.

The system is equipped with an assist

device to notify the driver of the

approximate distance from the vehicle

to the surrounding obstruction using a

audible alert.

Note:

Do not install any accessories within

the detection ranges of the sensors. It

may affect the system operation.

Depending on the type of

obstruction and the surrounding

conditions, the detection range of a

sensor may narrow, or the sensors

may not be able to detect

obstructions.

05200100-121-001AB

Parking Sensor Locations

167

The system may not operate

normally under the following

conditions:

Mud, ice, or snow adhered to the

sensor area (operation will return to

normal when removed).

The sensor area is frozen (operation

will return to normal when the ice is

thawed).

The sensor is covered by a hand or

excessive force has been applied to

the bumper.

The vehicle is on a steep incline.

Under extremely hot or cold

weather conditions.

The vehicle is driven on bumps,

inclines, gravel, or grass covered

roads.

Anything which generates

ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as

another vehicle's horn, the engine

sound of a motorcycle, the air brakes

of a large-sized vehicle, or another

vehicle's sensors.

The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or

in road conditions causing water

splash.

A antenna for a radio transmitter is

installed to the vehicle.

The vehicle is moving towards a tall

or square curbstone.

An obstruction is too close to the

sensor.

The following types of obstructions

may not be detected:

Thin objects such as wire or rope.

Things which absorb sonic waves

easily such as rain or snow.

Angular shaped objects.

Very tall objects, and those which

arewideatthetop.

Small, short objects.

Obstructions under the bumper

may not be detected. Obstructions

that are lower than the bumper or thin

which may have been initially detected

but are no longer detected as the

vehicle approaches more closely.

Always have the system inspected

by an authorized dealer if any force is

applied to the bumpers, even in a

minor accident. If the sensors have

been repositioned in any way, they

cannot detect obstructions.

The system may have a malfunction

if the audible signal does not operate.

Contact an authorized dealer.

The beeper which indicates a

system malfunction may not be heard

if the ambient temperature is extremely

cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to

the sensor area. Remove any foreign

material from the sensor area.

When installing a trailer hitch,

contact an authorized dealer.

Caution!

Only have repairs on the bumper in the

area of the sensors carried out by a

authorized dealer. Repairs on the bumper

that are not carried out properly may

compromise the operation of the parking

sensors.

Only have the bumpers repainted or any

retouches to the paint work in the area of

the sensors carried out by a authorized

dealer. Incorrect paint application could

affect the operation of the parking sensors.

Sensor Detection Range

The sensors detect obstructions within

the following range:

Lateral Detection Range:

19 inches (50 cm)

Rear Detection Range:

59 inches (150 cm)

System Operation

The system is operational when the

ignition is in the ON position and the

gear selector is shifted to REVERSE.

When an audible signal sounds, the

system is enabled for use.

168

STARTING AND OPERATING

Parking Sensor Audible Alert

The audible alert will sound while the system is operating according to the following chart:

Rear Sensor

Distance Detection Area

Distance Between Vehicle

And Obstruction

Audible Alert (*)

Farthest distance Approx. 59 - 23 inches (150 cm - 60 cm) Slow intermittent sound

Far

distance Approx. 23 -17 inches (60 - 45 cm) Medium intermittent sound

Middle distance Approx. 17 -13 inches (45 - 35 cm) Fast intermittent sound

Close distance Within approx. 13 inches (35 cm) Continuous sound

(*) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.

Rear Corner Sensor

Distance Detection Area

Distance Between Vehicle

And Obstruction

Audible Alert (**)

Far distance Approx. 19 - 14 inches (50 - 38 cm) Medium intermittent sound

Middle

distance Approx. 14 - 9.8 inches (38 - 25 cm) Fast intermittent sound

Close distance Within approx. 9.8 inches (25 cm) Continuous sound

(**) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.

Note: If an obstruction is detected in a zone for six seconds or more, the audible alert stops, unless the obstruction is within

the close distance zone. If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the corresponding audible alert is heard.

169

When A Warning Alert Is Activated

The system notifies the driver of an obstacle by activating the audible alert.

Beep How To Check

The audible alert is not heard.

The

system may have a malfunction.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

When the engine is turned ON, or if the parking sensor

detects a problem while driving, an intermittent audible

alert is heard one to four times(*).

Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system continues to sound

the audible alert, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

( * ) The number of times the audible alert is heard changes depending on the malfunction location.

170

STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKVIEW REAR

BACKUP CAMERA —

IF EQUIPPED

Operation

The camera is located on the trunk lid,

above the license plate.

Switching The Display To Rear View

Camera Mode:

Place the gear selector in the REVERSE

position, after the ignition is turned to

ON, to switch the display to rear-view

camera mode.

Note:

When the gear selector is moved

from the REVERSE position and put in

any other position, the screen returns

to the previous display mode.

When parking in REVERSE, take

care over obstacles that may be above

or under the camera’s display range.

When the display is cold, the images

could be more blurred than usual,

making it difficult to check the

conditions of the area around the

vehicle. Always use extreme caution and

verify the real conditions of the area

behind the vehicle with you own eyes.

If water, snow, or mud is deposited

on the camera lens, clean it with a soft

cloth. If this does not clean it, use a

mild detergent.

If the camera is subjected to abrupt

temperature changes (from hot to cold

or vice versa), the rear-view monitor

may not work properly.

When replacing tires, contact an

authorized dealer. Replacing the tires

can cause the guide lines that appear

on the display to be misaligned.

Warning!

Always use extreme caution and verify the

real conditions of the area behind the vehicle.

Backing up while looking only at the screen is

dangerous and can lead to an accident or

collision with an object. The rear-view

monitor is simply a system to aid reversing.

The view on the display can show a situation

that differs from the real one.

Do not use the rear-view monitor under

the following conditions:

Roads covered in ice or snow.

When snow chains are mounted or the

temporary space saver spare wheel is fitted.

The rear trunk is not completely closed.

The vehicle is on a sloping road.

Using the rear-view monitor under the

conditions listed above is dangerous and

can cause damage to persons and/or the

vehicle.

Caution!

Do not apply excessive force to the

camera. You could alter the position and

angle of the camera. Do not disassemble,

modify or remove it as this could

compromise the seal.

The camera’s cover is made of plastic.

Do not apply degreasers, organic solvents,

wax or glass polish to the camera’s cover.

If some substance ends up on the cover,

clean it off immediately with a soft cloth.

Do not rub the cover too much, nor

polish it with abrasive compounds or hard

brushes. The cover could be damaged and

create image problems.

If the vehicle has been involved in a

frontal, lateral or rear collision, the rear

parking camera’s alignment (location or

installation angle) may have been altered.

Contact a authorized dealer.

If the display shows "no video signal",

there may be a problem with the camera.

Contact an authorized dealer.

07040110-124-008AB

Rear Camera Location

171

Display

Note: The images on the display can

show a situation that differs from the

actual view.

The field of view varies depending on

the vehicle and the road conditions. The

field of view is limited. Objects below

the bumper or around it’s sides may not

be displayed.

The distance displayed by the camera

view differs from the actual view, as the

rear parking camera is equipped with a

special lens.

The camera could capture any

non-standard accessories installed on

the vehicle. Do not install non-standard

accessories that could interfere with the

camera’s view, such as lights or

reflectors.

Note: If it is difficult to see the display

under the following conditions, it does

not mean that there is a malfunction:

In dark areas.

When the temperature around the

lens is particularly high or low.

When the camera is wet from rain

or due to a high atmospheric humidity.

When there is some foreign deposit

around the camera, such as mud.

When the camera lens reflects

sunlight or a headlight beam.

The image on the display may be

delayed if the temperature around the

camera is low.

Caution!

To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView

should only be used as a parking aid. The

ParkView camera is unable to view every

obstacle or object in your drive path.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle

must be driven slowly when using ParkView

to be able to stop in time when an obstacle

is seen. It is recommended that the driver

look frequently over his/her shoulder when

using ParkView.

07080913987987

Camera View

1—BlockedArea

2 — Rear Bumper

07080913988988

Camera Field Of View

172

STARTING AND OPERATING

Looking At The Display

The vehicle width guide lines are

displayed on the screen as a reference

to show the width of the vehicle

compared to the width of the parking

space to be entered while in REVERSE.

Vehicle Width Guide Lines: these

guide lines serve as a reference

showing the width of the vehicle.

Distance Guide Lines: these lines

indicate the approximate distance from

the rear of the vehicle (the rear edge of

the bumper). The red and yellow lines

indicates the points at about 19 inches

(50 cm), for the red line and 39 inches

(1 m) for the yellow line, from the rear

bumper (central point of each line).

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the ParkView Rear Back

Up Camera. Always check carefully behind

your vehicle, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, or blind spots before backing

up. You are responsible for the safety of

your surroundings and must continue to

pay attention while backing up. Failure to

do so can result in serious injury or death.

Rear View Camera

Operation

The operating modes of the rear view

camera when the vehicle is in

REVERSE vary depending on traffic,

road, and vehicle conditions. Also, the

amount of turning and the duration of

the maneuver vary depending on the

conditions. Therefore, it is important to

check the surrounding conditions and

adapt the steering as necessary.

Note: The images from the rear

parking camera shown on the monitor

are reversed (mirror image).

1. Place the gear selector in the

REVERSE position to switch the display

to rear view camera mode.

2. Check the surrounding conditions

and begin backing up.

3. Once the vehicle starts to enter the

parking space, proceed slowly in

REVERSE while keeping the vehicle

width guide lines away from the two

sides of the parking space.

4. Continue to adjust the steering

wheel until the vehicle width guide lines

are parallel with the two sides of the

parking space.

07080913-111-111

Vehicle Width Guide Lines

07080913989989

Entering Parking Spot

A — Rear Camera View

B — Check Surrounding Area

173

5. Once the guide lines are parallel,

straighten the steering wheel and

reverse slowly into the parking space.

Continue to check the vehicle’s

surroundings and stop in the best

position possible (if the parking space

has dividing lines, check that the vehicle

width guide lines are parallel with them).

6. When the gear selector is moved

from the REVERSE position and put in

any other position, the screen returns to

the previous display mode.

Note:

Since there may be some

differences between the displayed

image and the real conditions, always

visually inspect the area behind the

vehicle, and the surrounding areas, to

make sure they are completely clear.

In the image of the parking space

(or garage) shown above, the rear of

the vehicle and the distance guide lines

may seem parallel on the monitor, but

may not be when the parked vehicle is

inspected.

When you enter a parking space

with a dividing line only on one side,

the dividing line and the vehicle width

guide lines may appear parallel on the

monitor, but may not be when the

parked vehicle is inspected.

Road Conditions And

Displayed Image

There are some differences between

what is shown on the display, and the

actual road conditions.

The different perceptions of distance

could lead to an accident. The

conditions that can lead to the different

perceptions of distance, listed below,

must be taken into consideration:

When The Vehicle Slopes Due To

The Weight Of Passengers And

Load:

When the vehicle is rear heavy, the

object on the screen seems to be

further away than it really is.

07080913990990

Entering Parking Spot

A — Rear Camera View

B — Check Surrounding Area

07080913991991

Loaded Vehicle Camera Angle

1 — Object

2 — Variance

174

STARTING AND OPERATING

When The Road Behind The

Vehicle Slopes Steeply:

When the vehicle is on a steep uphill

(downhill) slope, the object on the

screen seems to be further away than it

really is.

Three Dimensional Object Behind

The Vehicle:

Since the distance guide line display is

based on a flat surface, the distance to

a three dimensional object on the

screen differs from the actual distance.

07080913992992

Downhill Camera Angle

1 — Distance Between The Vehicle

And Object Displayed On The Screen

2 — Actual Distance Between

The Vehicle And Object

3 — Appears Farther Than Actual

Distance

4 — Object At Actual Position

5 — Object On Screen

07080913993993

Downgrade Camera Angle

1 — Distance Between The Vehicle

And Object Displayed On The Screen

2 — Actual Distance Between The

Vehicle And Object

3 — Appears Closer Than Actual

Distance

4 — Object On Screen

5 — Object At Actual Position

07080913994994

Three-Dimensional Object

Camera View

A—ObjectInView

B — Actual Distance To Object

C — Appears Farther Than Actual

175

Adjusting The Image

Quality

The image quality can be adjusted with

the gear selector in the REVERSE

position.

Four adjustments can be made:

brightness, contrast, tint and color. Give

attention to the vehicle’s surroundings

while making adjustments:

1. Select the icon on the top left of the

screen to display the tabs.

2. Select the desired tab.

3. Use the cursor to adjust the

brightness, contrast, tint and color. If a

reset is needed, press the reset button.

4. Select the icon on the top left of the

screen to close the tabs.

Warning!

Adjusting the rear-view camera image quality

must always be done when the vehicle is

stationary. Do not adjust the rear-view camera

image quality while vehicle driving. Adjusting

the image quality (brightness, contrast, color

and tint) of the rear-view camera while driving

the vehicle is dangerous since it could distract

the driver and cause a serious accident.

07080914-111-111

Image Quality Adjustments

176

STARTING AND OPERATING

REFUELING THE

VEHICLE

Refueling The Vehicle

Stop the engine before refueling.

Fuel Requirements

Vehicles with catalytic converters or

oxygen sensors must use ONLY

UNLEADED FUEL, which will reduce

exhaust emissions and keep spark plug

fouling to a minimum.

Fuel: Premium unleaded fuel.

Octane Rating

(Anti-knock index): 91

(R + M)/2 method or

above (96 RON or

above) (U.S. federal

law requires that

octane ratings be

posted on gasoline station pumps).

Regular unleaded fuel with an octane

rating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON) can

be used, but this will reduce

performance slightly, such as reduced

engine output, and engine knocking.

Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane

(91 RON) will negatively affect the

emission control system performance

and could also cause engine knocking

and serious engine damage.

While operating on gasoline with an

octane number of 87, hearing a light

knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the

engine is heard making a heavy

knocking sound, see your authorized

dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with

an octane number lower than 87 can

cause engine failure and may void or

not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline

can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you

experience these symptoms, try

another brand of gasoline before

considering service for the vehicle.

Gasoline blended with oxygenates such

as alcohol or ether compounds are

generally referred to as oxygenated

fuels.

The common gasoline blend that can

be used with your vehicle is ethanol

blended at no more than 15%. Gasoline

containing alcohol, such as ethanol or

methanol, may be marketed under the

name "Gasohol".

Vehicle damage and problems resulting

from the use of the following may not

be covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty:

Alcohol containing more than 15%

ethanol.

Gasoline or alcohol containing

methanol.

Leaded fuel or leaded alcohol.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the

use of cleaner burning gasoline referred

to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains

oxygenates and are specifically blended

to reduce vehicle emissions and

improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is

recommended. Properly blended

reformulated gasoline will provide

improved performance and durability of

engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate

Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded

gasoline with oxygenates such as

ethanol.

Caution!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol

or gasoline containing more than 15%

ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may

result in starting and drivability problems,

damage critical fuel system components,

cause emissions to exceed the applicable

standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction

Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please

observe pump labels as they should clearly

communicate if a fuel contains greater than

15% ethanol (E-15).

177

Problems that result from using

gasoline containing more than 15%

ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing

methanol are not the responsibility of

the manufacturer and may void or not

be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex

Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are

compatible with gasoline containing up

to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently

fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will

have some or all of these symptoms:

Operate in a lean mode.

OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light”

on.

Poor engine performance.

Poor cold start and cold drivability.

Increased risk for fuel system

component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese

Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-

containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase

octane. Gasoline blended with MMT

provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane

number without MMT. Gasoline blended

with MMT reduces spark plug life and

reduces emissions system performance

in some vehicles. The manufacturer

recommends that gasoline without

MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT

content of gasoline may not be

indicated on the gasoline pump;

therefore, you should ask your gasoline

retailer whether the gasoline contains

MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and

California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with

the proper octane rating, gasolines that

contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended.

Using gasolines that have these

additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and

maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline

contains a higher level

of detergents to further

aide in minimizing

engine and fuel system

deposits. When available, the usage of

Top Tier Detergent gasoline is

recommended. Visit

www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system

cleaning agents should be avoided.

Many of these materials intended for

gum and varnish removal may contain

active solvents or similar ingredients.

These can harm fuel system gasket and

diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

Caution!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your

vehicle’s performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited

by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can

impair engine performance and damage

the emissions control system.

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or

ignition malfunctions can cause the

catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice

a pungent burning odor or some light

smoke, your engine may be out of tune or

malfunctioning and may require immediate

service. Contact your authorized dealer for

service assistance.

The use of fuel additives, which are now

being sold as octane enhancers, is not

recommended. Most of these products

contain high concentrations of methanol.

Fuel system damage or vehicle

performance problems resulting from the

use of such fuels or additives is not the

responsibility of the manufacturer and may

void or not be covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Note: Intentional tampering with the

emissions control system can result in

civil penalties being assessed against

you.

178

STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide

Warnings

Warning!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is

deadly. Follow the precautions below to

prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They

contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the

engine in a closed area, such as a garage,

and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If

the vehicle is stopped in an open area with

the engine running for more than a short

period, adjust the ventilation system to

force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

Guard against carbon monoxide with

proper maintenance. Have the exhaust

system inspected every time the vehicle is

raised. Have any abnormal conditions

repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with

all side windows fully open.

Refueling Procedure

Fuel Filler Door

Note: Always use only a designated

FCA fuel filler cap or an approved

equivalent, available at your authorized

dealer. The wrong cap can result in a

serious malfunction of the fuel and

emission control systems.

When the fuel filler door end is pressed

with the doors unlocked, the fuel filler

door rises.

The fuel filler door operates in

conjunction with the door

locking/unlocking mechanism.

To close, press the fuel filler door until a

click sound is heard.

Note:

Make sure to lock both the doors

when leaving the vehicle.

Lock the doors after closing the fuel

filler door. If the fuel filler door is closed

after locking the doors, the fuel filler

door cannot be locked.

Fuel Filler Cap

To remove the fuel filler cap, turn it

counterclockwise. Attach the removed

cap to the inner side of the fuel filler

door.

To close the fuel filler cap, turn it

clockwise until a click is heard.

04040201-12A-002AB

Fuel Filler Door

04040202-12A-001AB

Fuel Filler Cap

179

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit in

or near the vehicle when the gas cap is

removed or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine is

running. This is in violation of most state

and federal fire regulations and may cause

the MIL to turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped

into a portable container that is inside of a

vehicle. You could be burned. Always place

gas containers on the ground while filling.

Do not apply any object/plug to the end

of the filler which is not provided for the

vehicle. The use of non-compliant

objects/plugs could cause a pressure

increase inside the tank, resulting in

dangerous situations.

Do not use a mobile phone near the

refueling pump: risk of fire.

Emergency Fuel Filler

Door Release

If the battery is discharged, the fuel filler

door cannot be opened. In this case,

the fuel filler door can be opened by

taking care of the discharged battery

situation.

If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

even if the discharged battery situation

has been resolved, the electrical system

may have a malfunction.

In this case, the fuel filler door can be

opened using the following procedure

as an emergency measure:

1. Open the trunk and pull the center

section of the plastic fastener and

remove the fastener.

2. Partially peel back the cover inside

the trunk, then pull the emergency

release lever.

08100100-121-002

Trunk Interior

1 — Plastic Fasteners

2 — Cover

08100100-122-001

Fuel Door Emergency Release

3 — Emergency Release Lever

180

STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration regulations, your

vehicle has a certification label affixed to

the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year

of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A

Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the

Month, Day and Hour of manufacture.

The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible

weight of your vehicle including driver,

passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum

capacities of front and rear axle

systems (GAWR). Total load must be

limited so GVWR and front and rear

GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as

the allowable load weight a truck can

carry, including the weight of the driver,

all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible

load on the front and rear axles. The

load must be distributed in the cargo

area so that the GAWR of each axle is

not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the

components in the system with the

lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles

or suspension components sometimes

specified by purchasers for increased

durability does not necessarily increase

the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification

Label represents the actual tire size on

your vehicle. Replacement tires must be

equal to the load capacity of this tire

size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate

for the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for

your vehicle for all loading conditions up

to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined

as the total weight of the vehicle with all

fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no

occupants or cargo loaded into the

vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your

vehicle on a commercial scale before

any occupants or cargo are added.

The actual total weight and the weight of

the front and rear of your vehicle at the

ground can best be determined by

weighing it when it is loaded and ready

for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed

on a commercial scale to insure that the

GVWR has not been exceeded. The

weight on the front and rear of the

vehicle should then be determined

separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over the front and

rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show

that the GAWR of either the front or rear

axles has been exceeded but the total

load is within the specified GVWR. If so,

weight must be shifted from front to rear

or rear to front as appropriate until the

specified weight limitations are met.

181

Store the heavier items down low and be

sure that the weight is distributed equally.

Stow all loose items securely before

driving.

Improper weight distributions can have

an adverse effect on the way your vehicle

steers and handles and the way the

brakes operate.

Caution!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than

the GVWR or the maximum front and rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can

break, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could cause you to

lose control. Also overloading can shorten

the life of your vehicle.

TOWING TRAILERS

Trailer Towing

Your car is not designed for towing.

Recreational Towing

An example of "recreational towing" is

towing your vehicle behind a

motorhome.

The transmission is not designed for

towing this vehicle on all four wheels.

Caution!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to

the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle

requires towing, make sure the drive

wheels are OFF the ground.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe

transmission damage. Damage from

improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

DRIVING TIPS

Engine Break-In

Recommendation

No special break-in is necessary, but a

few precautions in the first 620 miles

(1000 km) may add to the performance,

economy, and life of the vehicle:

Do not race the engine.

Do not maintain one constant speed,

either slow or fast, for a long period of

time.

Do not drive constantly at full-throttle

or high engine rpm for extended

periods of time.

Avoid unnecessary hard stops.

Avoid full-throttle starts.

182

STARTING AND OPERATING

Saving Fuel And

Protection Of The

Environment

How you operate your vehicle

determines how far it will travel on a

tankoffuel.

Use these suggestions to help save fuel

and reduce CO

Avoid long warm-ups. Once the

engine runs smoothly, begin driving.

Avoid fast starts.

Drive at lower speeds.

Anticipate when to apply the brakes

(avoid sudden braking).

Follow the maintenance schedule

and contact your authorized dealer.

Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

Slow down on rough roads.

Keep the tires properly inflated.

Do not carry unnecessary weight.

Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving.

Keep the wheels in correct

alignment.

Keep windows closed at high

speeds.

Slow down when driving in

crosswinds and headwinds.

Hazardous Driving

When driving on ice or in water, snow,

mud, sand, or similar hazards:

Be cautious and allow extra distance

for braking.

Avoid sudden braking and sudden

maneuvering.

Do not pump the brakes. Continue to

press down on the brake pedal.

If you get stuck, select a lower gear

and accelerate slowly. Do not spin the

rear wheels.

For more traction in starting on

slippery surfaces such as ice or packed

snow, use sand, rock salt, chains,

carpeting, or other nonslip material

under the rear wheels.

Note: Usesnowchainsonlyonthe

rear wheels.

Floor Mat Safety

Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit

the footwell of your vehicle. Use only

floor mats that leave the pedal area

unobstructed and that are firmly

secured so that they cannot slip out of

position and interfere with the pedals or

impair safe operation of your vehicle in

other ways.

Warning!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or

stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat

fasteners may cause your floor mat to

interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch

pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach

your floor

mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT

install your floor mat upside down or turn

your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm

mat is secured using the floor mat

fasteners on a regular basis.

ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING

FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat.

NEVER install or stack an additional floor

mat on top of an existing floor mat.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fit

your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that

cannot be properly attached and secured

to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be

04090400-USA-001

Floor Mat Retention Post Location

183

replaced, only use a FCA approved floor

mat for the specific make, model, and year

of your vehicle.

ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on

the driver’s side floor area. To check for

interference, with the vehicle properly

parked with the engine off, fully depress the

accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal

(if present) to check for interference. If your

floor mat interferes with the operation of

any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,

remove the floor mat from the vehicle and

place the floor mat in your trunk.

ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat

on the passenger’s side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall

or slide into the driver’s side floor area

when the vehicle is moving. Objects can

become trapped under accelerator, brake,

or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of

vehicle control.

NEVER place any objects under the floor

mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects

could change the position of the floor mat

and may cause interference with the

accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removed

and re-installed, always properly attach

carpet to the floor and check the floor mat

fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.

Fully depress each pedal to check for

interference with the accelerator, brake, or

clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soap

and water to clean your floor mats. After

cleaning, always check your floor mat has

been properly installed and is secured to

your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners

by lightly pulling mat.

Rocking The Vehicle

Note: Too much rocking may cause

engine overheating, transmission failure,

and tire damage.

If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from snow, sand or mud, depress the

accelerator slightly and slowly move the

gear selector from 1 (D) to R.

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause damage, or even

failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin

your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds

continuously without stopping when you

are stuck and do not let anyone near a

spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Caution!

When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by

shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do

not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph

(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

Revving the engine or spinning the

wheels too fast may lead to transmission

overheating and failure. It can also damage

the tires. Do not spin the wheels above

30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no

transmission shifting occurring).

184

STARTING AND OPERATING

Winter Driving

Carry emergency gear, including tire

chains, window scraper, flares, a small

shovel, jumper leads, and a small bag

of sand or salt.

Contact an authorized dealer to check

the following:

Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in

the radiator.

Inspect the battery and its leads.

Cold reduces battery capacity.

Use an engine oil appropriate for the

lowest ambient temperatures that the

vehicle will be driven in.

Inspect the ignition system for

damage and loose connections.

Use winter windshield washer fluid

that will not freeze.

Note:

Remove snow before driving. Snow

left on the windshield is dangerous as

it could obstruct vision.

Drive slowly. Braking performance

can be adversely affected if snow or

ice adheres to the brake components.

If this situation occurs, drive the vehicle

slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal

and lightly applying the brakes several

times until the brake performance

returns to normal.

Do not open or close the soft top when

the temperature is 41 °F (5 °C) or less.

The material of the soft top could be

damaged by freezing.

Do not apply excessive force to a

window scraper when removing ice or

frozen snow on the mirror glass and

windshield.

Never use warm or hot water for

removing snow or ice from windows

and mirrors as it could result in the

glass cracking.

Snow Tires

If your vehicle is equipped with the tire

pressure monitoring system (vehicle

with run-flat tires), the system may not

function correctly when using tires with

steel wire reinforcement in the

sidewalls.

Use Snow Tires on all Four Wheels:

Do not exceed the maximum

permissible speed for your snow tires or

legal speed limits.

When snow tires are used, select the

specified size and pressure.

Tire Chains

Check local regulations before using tire

chains.

If your vehicle is equipped with the

TPMS system, the system may not

function correctly when using tire

chains.

Install the chains on the rear tires only.

Do not use chains on the front tires.

Note:

Chains may affect handling.

Do not go faster than 30 mph

(50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's

recommended limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, and sharp turns.

Avoid locked-wheel braking.

Do not use chains on roads that are

free of snow or ice. The tires and

chains could be damaged.

Chains may scratch or chip

aluminium wheels.

Warning!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,

Snow) between front and rear axles can

cause unpredictable handling. You could

lose control and have a collision.

185

Caution!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,

observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other

suspension components, it is important

that only traction devices in good condition

are used. Broken devices can cause

serious damage. Stop the vehicle

immediately if noise occurs that could

indicate device breakage. Remove the

damaged parts of the device before further

use.

Install device as tightly as possible and

then retighten after driving about ½ mile

(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with a loaded

vehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period on

dry pavement.

Observe the traction device

manufacturer’s instructions on the method

of installation, operating speed, and

conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device

manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph

(48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on a

compact spare tire.

Driving In Flooded Area

Note: Do not drive the vehicle on

flooded roads as it could cause short

circuit of electrical/electronic parts, or

water enters the engine and causes it

to lock up (hydro-lock) and stall. If the

vehicle has been immersed in water

contact your authorized dealer.

Although your vehicle is capable of

driving through shallow standing water,

consider the following Cautions and

Warnings before doing so.

Warning!

Driving through standing water limits

your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not

exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water.

Driving through standing water limits

your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which

increases stopping distances. Therefore,

after driving through standing water, drive

slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal

several times to dry the brakes.

Failure to follow these warnings may

result in injuries that are serious or fatal to

you, your passengers, and others around

you.

Caution!

Always check the depth of the standing

water before driving through it. Never drive

through standing water that is deeper than

the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the

vehicle.

Determine the condition of the road or

the path that is under water and if there are

any obstacles in the way before driving

through the standing water.

Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when

driving through standing water. This will

minimize wave effects.

Driving through standing water may

cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain

components. Always inspect your vehicle’s

fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle,

etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid

that is milky or foamy in appearance) after

driving through standing water. Do not

continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid

appears contaminated, as this may result in

further damage. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Getting water inside your vehicle’s

engine can cause it to lock up and stall out,

and cause serious internal damage to the

engine. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

186

STARTING AND OPERATING

Overloading

Note: Be careful not to overload your

vehicle. The gross axle weight rating

(GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight

rating (GVWR) of the vehicle are on the

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on

the driver's door frame. Exceeding

these ratings can cause an accident or

vehicle damage. You can estimate the

weight of the load by weighing the

items (or people) before putting them in

the vehicle.

Driving On Uneven Road

Your vehicle's suspension and

underbody can be damaged if driven

on rough/uneven roads or over speed

bumps at excessive speeds.

Use care and reduce speed when

traveling on rough/uneven roads or over

speed bumps.

Use care not to damage the vehicle's

underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when

driving under the following conditions:

Ascending or descending a slope

with a sharp transition angle.

Ascending or descending a driveway

or trailer ramp with a sharp transition

angle.

This vehicle is equipped with low profile

tires allowing class-leading performance

and handling. As a result, the sidewall

of the tires are very thin and the tires

and wheels can be damaged if driven

through potholes or on rough/uneven

roads at excessive speeds.

Use care and reduce speed when

traveling on rough/uneven roads or

through potholes.

187

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .190

REPLACING A BULB..........190

REPLACING FUSES ..........197

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .203

TIRE SERVICE KIT ...........207

JUMPSTARTING............216

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .218

TOWINGTHEVEHICLE........219

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .222

188

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING

LIGHTS

Control

The Hazard Warning Lights should

alwaysbeusedwhenyoustoponor

near a roadway in an emergency.

The Hazard Warning Light switch is

located on the center instrument panel

below the radio. Push the switch to turn

theHazardWarningLightsonoroff.

Note: The Hazard Warning Lights warn

other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic

hazard and that they must take extreme

caution when near it.

When the switch is pushed, the Hazard

Warning Lights are active and all

directional turn signals will flash on and

off to warn oncoming traffic of an

emergency. Push the switch a second

time to turn off the Hazard War ning

Lights. The hazard warning indicator

lights in the instrument cluster will flash

simultaneously.

Note:

The turn signals do not work while

the Hazard Warning Lights are

activated.

Check local regulations about the

use of Hazard Warning Lights while the

vehicle is being towed to verify that it is

not in violation of the law.

If the brake pedal is pressed while

driving on slippery roads, the

emergency stop signal system could

operate causing all of the directional

turn signals to flash.

While the emergency stop signal

system is operating, all of the

directional turn signals automatically

flash rapidly to caution the driver of a

vehicle following behind of a sudden

braking situation.

REPLACING A BULB

General Instructions

Warning!

Before proceeding with the replacement

of the lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are

cool: DANGER OF BURNS!

Modifications or repair of the electrical

system performed incorrectly and without

taking into account the technical

characteristics can cause malfunctions with

the risk of fire.

Halogen lamps contain gas under

pressure, in the event of breakage be

careful of the projection of fragments of

glass.

Halogen lamps must be handled by

touching only the metallic part. If the

transparent bulb is in contact with the

fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted

light and you can also affect the life of the

lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the

bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol

and allow

to dry.

05031100-L12-001AB

Hazard Warning Light Switch

189

Before replacing a bulb check the

contacts for oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others of

the same type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb,

always check its alignment.

To replace the bulb, contact your

authorized dealer.

When a light is not working, check

that the corresponding fuse is intact

before replacing the bulb. For the

location of fuses, refer to the section on

“Replacing Fuses” in this chapter.

Caution!

Use the protective cover and carton for the

replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb

promptly and out of the reach of children.

Note:

When removing the lens or light unit

using a flathead screwdriver, make

sure that the flathead screwdriver does

not contact the interior terminal. If the

flathead screwdriver contacts the

terminal, a short circuit may occur.

When the weather is cold or damp

or after heavy rain or washing, the

surface of headlights or rear lights may

steam up and/or form drops of

condensation on the inside. This is a

natural phenomenon due to the

difference in temperature and humidity

between the inside and the outside of

the glass which does not indicate a

fault and does not compromise the

normal operation of lighting devices.

The mist disappears quickly when the

lights are turned on, starting from the

center of the diffuser, extending

progressively towards the edges.

190

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Replacement Bulbs

Light Bulbs Type Power

Front Position LED

–

Front Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) W5W 5 W

Front Positions/Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) WY5W 5 W

High Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED –

High Beam/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) HB3 60 W

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED –

Low Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED –

Low Beam (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) H11 55 W

Front Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W

Side Direction Indicator Light WY5W 5 W

Fog Light H11 55 W

Rear Position Lights LED –

Stop Lights LED –

Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED –

Rear Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W

Rear Side Marker W5W 5 W

Reverse Light W21W 21 W

License Plate Light W5W 5 W

Overhead Light 10 W

Trunk Lid Light 5W

191

Light Bulbs

Front Lights

The bulbs are arranged as follows :

Rear Lights

The bulbs are arranged as follows :

Replacing Exterior

Lights

Headlights (low beam)

(If Equipped with halogen bulb)

Proceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,

start the engine, turn the steering wheel

all the way to the right, and turn off

engine. If you are changing the left bulb,

turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and the headlight

switch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the seven

locations and partially peel back the

mud guard.

4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and

remove it, disconnect the connector

from the unit by pressing the tab on the

connector with your finger and pulling

the connector.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise and remove it.

6. Disconnect the bulb from the

socket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

04110102-L38-008AB

Head Lights

1 — High Beam with Daytime Running

Lights (DRL)/Position Light/Low Beam/

Side Marker

2 — Front Indicator Light

3 — Fog Light

04110102-L40-010AB

Rear Lights

4 — Position Light/Stop Light/Rear

Direction Indicator Light

5 — Reverse Light — If Equipped

6 — Third Stop Light

08020499000002

Mud Guard

1 — Fasteners

2 — Mud Guard

192

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Headlights (High Beam) With

Daytime Running Lights

(If Equipped With LED Lamps)

Proceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,

start the engine, turn the steering wheel

all the way to the right, and turn off

engine. If you are changing the left bulb,

turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and the headlight

switch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the seven

locations and partially peel back the

mud guard.

4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise and remove it.

5. Turn the cover counterclockwise and

remove it, disconnect the connector

from the unit by pressing the tab on the

connector with your finger and pulling

the connector.

6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise and remove it.

7. Disconnect the bulb from the

socket.

8. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Front Direction Indicator Lights

Proceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,

start the engine, turn the steering wheel

all the way to the right, and turn off

engine. If you are changing the left bulb,

turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and the headlight

switch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the five

locations and partially peel back the

mud guard.

4. Disconnect the connector from the

unit by pressing the tab on the

connector with your finger and pulling

the connector rearward.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise and remove it.

08020499000010

Head Lamp Assembly

1 — High Beam Lamp

2 — Position Lamp

3 — Daytime Running Lamp

07031501-206-002AB

Mud Guard

193

6. Disconnect the bulb from the

socket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Fog Lights

Proceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,

start the engine, turn the steering wheel

all the way to the right, and turn off

engine. If you are changing the left bulb,

turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is switched

off, and the headlight switch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the five

locations and partially peel back the

mud guard.

4. Disconnect the connector from the

unit by pressing the tab on the

connector with your finger and pulling

the connector.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise, extract the bulb and

remove it.

6. Disconnect the bulb from the

socket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Brake lights / Tail lights

Go to your authorized dealer when the

replacement of this lights is necessary.

Side Direction Indicator Lights

Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and the headlight

switch is off.

2. If you are changing the right bulb,

start the engine, turn the steering wheel

all the way to the right, and turn off

engine. If you are changing the left bulb,

turn the steering wheel to the left.

3. Remove the fasteners in the five

locations and partially peel back the

mud guard.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb by pressing the tab on

the connector with your finger and

pulling the connector.

5. Remove the lens assembly by

pressing the tab on the unit with your

finger and pulling the unit forward to

compress in the internal catch, then pull

the cluster outwards.

07031501-207-001

Front Direction Indicator Housing

1 — Socket Assembly

2 — Bulb

07031501-208-002AB

Direction Indicator Lamp Connector

194

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6. Lift up the lens assembly, and then

remove the cluster and install the new

side direction indicator lens assembly in

the reverse order of the removal

procedure.

Front Side Marker

(If Equipped With Halogen Bulb)

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the fasteners in the seven

locations and partially peel back the

upper side of the mud guard.

2. Turn the socket counterclockwise,

remove socket assembly then remove

the bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

08020499-000-011AB

Side Direction Indicator

1 — Fasteners

07031501-210-001AB

Side Direction Indicator

2 — Lens Assembly

07031501211001

Side Direction Indicator

3 — Internal Catch

4 — Lens Assembly

08070604-123-100

Front Side Marker

1 — Socket

2 — Bulb Assembly

195

Rear Direction Indicator Lights

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the retainers and the trunk

lid end trim.

2. Disconnect the connector from the

unit by pressing the tab on the

connector with your finger.

3. Remove the screw and nuts.

4. Pull the taillight housing rearward to

remove it.

07031501-212-002

Trunk Trim

1 — Retainers

07031501214002

Trunk Trim

2 — Connector

07031501213002

Rear Direction Indicator Socket

3 — Connector

07031501-215-001

Taillight Housing Fasteners

4—Screw

5 — Nuts

07031501-216-001AB

Rear of Vehicle

6 — Taillight Housing

196

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise to remove from

taillight housing, and remove bulb.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Reverse Light

Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and the headlight

switch is off.

2. Turn the socket assembly

counterclockwise to remove, and

remove bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Rear Side Marker

Proceed as follows:

1. Push the lens assembly rearward to

compress the internal catch, then pull

the lens assembly outwards.

2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise to remove, and

remove bulb.

07031501-203-002

Taillight Housing

7 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

07031501-219-001

Reverse Light

1 — Socket Assembly

2 — Bulb

08070605AB

Rear Side Marker

1 — Rear Side Marker Lens Assembly

197

3. Install the new bulb and then

reinstall the socket in the reverse order

of the removal procedure.

License Plate Lights

Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and the headlight

switch is off.

2. Slide the unit as shown in the figure

to remove it.

3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly

counterclockwise and remove, remove

bulb.

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure. Insert

catch and push the housing back into

place.

08070606-123-100

Side Marker Housing

2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

07031501220001

Trunk Lid

1 — License Plate Light Assembly

07031501-221-001

License Plate Light Housing

2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

198

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Replacing Interior Light

Bulbs

Overhead Light

Proceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool to prevent

damage to the lens, remove the

overhead light by carefully prying on the

edge of the lens.

2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Trunk Light

Proceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool to prevent

damage to the to the lens, remove the

trunk light lens by carefully prying on

the edge of the lens.

2. Disconnect the connector from the

trunk light lens.

3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

07031502-201-001

Overhead Light Location

1 — Overhead Light Lens

07031502-202-001

Trunk Light

1 — Trunk Light Lens

07031502-203-001

Trunk Light Housing

2 — Connector

199

REPLACING FUSES

General Information

Warning!

When replacing a blown fuse, always

use an appropriate replacement fuse with

the same amp rating as the original fuse.

Never replace a fuse with another fuse of

higher amp rating. Never replace a blown

fuse with metal wires or any other material.

Failure to use proper fuses may result in

serious personal injury, fire and/or property

damage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure that

the ignition is off and that all the other

services are switched off and/or

disengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contact

an authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safety

systems (air bag system, braking system),

power unit systems (engine system,

transmission system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Your vehicle's electrical system is

protected by fuses.

If any lights, accessories, or controls do

not work, inspect the appropriate circuit

protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside

element will be melted. If the same fuse

blows again, go to an authorized dealer

as soon as possible.

Fuse location

Fuses are grouped together in two fuse

boxes located in the interior on the left

side of the vehicle and under the hood.

Interior Fuses

If the electrical system does not work,

first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's

left side.

Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed in

the OFF mode, and other switches are

turned off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover (located

near the door).

3. Press retaining clip and remove

protection cover.

4. Pull the fuse straight out with the

fuse puller provided on the fuse block

located in the engine compartment.

07031601-121-001

Fuse Panel Cover

07031601-122-001

Fuse Puller

200

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is

blown.

6. Insert a new fuse of the same

amperage rating, and make sure it fits

tightly. If it does not fit tightly, contact

your authorized dealer. If you have no

spare fuses, borrow one of the same

rating from a circuit not essential to

vehicle operation, such as the audio or

outlet circuit.

7. Reinstall the cover and make sure

that it is securely installed.

Note: Always replace a fuse with a

genuine FCA fuse or equivalent of the

same rating. Otherwise you may

damage the electric system.

Underhood Fuses

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work and the fuses

in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse

block in the engine compartment. If a

fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

Make sure the ignition is placed in the

OFF mode, and other switches are

turned off and remove the fuse block

cover. If the lock is forcefully opened,

the fuse block cover may come in

contact with the frame when it is

removed and become scratched.

When removing the cover, remove it

slowly according to the following

procedure:

1. Disengage the rear lock by pressing

down on the front tab with your fingers.

2. Remove the front tab while slightly

lifting the front of the cover.

3. Remove the cover while lifting it and

sliding it to the rear.

4. If any fuse but the main fuse is

blown, replace it with a new one of the

same amperage rating.

5. Reinstall the cover and make sure

that it is securely installed.

07031601-ALL-001

Fuses

1 — Normal Fuse

2 — Blown Fuse

07031601-123-001

Underhood Fuse Block

1 — Lock

2 — Cover

07031601-ALL-002AB

Fuse

1 — Normal Fuse

2 — Blown Fuse

201

Fuse Block (Engine Compartment)

07031602-121-001

202

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F01 ENG IG3 5 A Engine Control Systems

F02

ENG IG2 5 A Engine Control Systems

F03 HORN2 7.5 A Horn

F04 C/U IG1 15 A For Protection Of Various Circuits

F05 ENG IG1 7.5 A Engine Control System

F06 — — —

F07 INTERIOR 15 A Overhead Light

F08 — — —

F09 AUDIO2 15 A Audio System

F10 METER1 10 A Instrument Cluster

F11 SRS1 7.5 A Air Bag

F12 — — —

F13 RADIO 7.5 A Audio System

F14 ENGINE3 20 A Engine Control System

F15 ENGINE1 10 A Engine Control System

F16 ENGINE2 15 A Engine Control System

F17 AUDIO1 25 A Audio System

F18 A/C MAG 7.5 A Air Conditioner

F19 AT PUMP H/L HI 20 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped)

F20 AT 15 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped)

203

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F21 D LOCK 25 A Power Door Locks

F22

H/L RH 20 A Headlight (RH)

F23 ENG + B2 7.5 A Engine Control System

F24 TAIL 20 A Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights

F25 — — —

F26 ROOM 25 A Overhead Light

F27 FOG 15 A Fog Lights

F28 H/CLEAN 20 A Headlight Washer (If Equipped)

F29 STOP 10 A Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped)

F30 HORN 15 A Horn

F31 H/L LH 20 A Headlight (LH)

F32 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS/DSC System

F33 HAZARD 15 A Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights

F34 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel System

F35 ENG + B3 5 A Engine Control System

F36 WIPER 20 A Windshield Wipers

F37 CABIN + B 50 A For Protection Of Various Circuits

F38 — — —

F39 — — —

F40 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS/DSC System

204

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F41 EVVT A/R PUMP 20 A Engine Control System

F42

— — —

F43 — — —

F44 FAN2 40 A Cooling Fan

F45 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine Control System

F46 EPS 60 A Power Steering System

F47 DEFOG 30 A Rear Window Defogger

F48 IG2 30 A For Protection Of Various Circuits

F49 — — —

F50 HEATER 40 A Air Conditioner

F51 — — —

F52 — — —

205

Fuse Block Interior

07031602-03F-002

206

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F01 RHT R 30 A —

F02

RHT L 30 A —

F03 — — —

F04 — — —

F05 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory Sockets

F06 — — —

F07 AT IND 7.5 A AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped

F08 MIRROR 7.5 A Power Control Mirror

F09 R_DECK R 30 A —

F10 R_DECK L 30 A —

F11 F.WASHER 15 A Windshield Washer

F12 P.WINDOW 30 A Power Windows

F13 — — —

F14 SRS2/ESCL 15 A —

F15 — — —

F16 — — —

207

JACKING AND TIRE

CHANGING

Warning!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the

side of the vehicle close to moving traffic.

Pull far enough off the road to avoid the

danger of being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is

dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the

jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.

Never put any part of your body under a

vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service

center where it can be raised on a lift.

The jack is designed to be used as a

tool for changing tires only. The jack should

not be used to lift the vehicle for service

purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on

a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

Tools Location

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

spare tire, jack, lug wrench and tow

eyes. For details, contact an authorized

dealer.

Tools are stored in the trunk.

Preparations For

Jacking

To Remove The Jack

Proceed as follows:

1. In the right side of the trunk, pull the

cover tab to remove cover.

08020100-122-002

Jack Tools

1 — Jack Lever

2 — Lug Wrench (If Equipped)

3 — Tow Eyes (If Equipped)

08020101-124-001

Jack Location

1 — Cover Tab

2 — Jack And Tools Cover

208

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw

counterclockwise.

To Secure The Jack

Proceed as follows:

1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with

the jack screw pointing back, and turn

the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily

tighten it.

2. Turn the jack screw clockwise.

3. Turn the wing bolt completely to

secure the jack.

4. Insert the cover tabs and install the

cover.

Warning!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

jack parts and the spare tire in the places

provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Maintenance

Always keep the jack clean.

Make sure the moving parts are kept

free from dirt or rust.

Make sure the screw thread is

adequately lubricated.

Conditions Of Non-Use

Temperatures below -40°F (−40°C)

On sandy or muddy ground

On uneven ground

On steep roads

In extreme weather conditions

In direct contact with the engine or

for repairs under the vehicle

On boats

Jacking Instructions

Note: Make sure the jack is well

lubricated before using it.

Warning!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side

of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull

far enough off the road to avoid being hit

when operating the jack or changing the

wheel.

Proceed as follows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position that

does not cause any danger to traffic

and lets you change the tire in safety, as

far as possible from the edge of the

driving lane. The ground must be flat

and sufficiently compact.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Lights

and engage the parking brake.

3. For vehicles with automatic

transmission, place the gear selector in

PARK. For vehicles with manual

transmission, place gear selector in

REVERSE and turn the engine to OFF.

4. Stop the engine. The motor must be

kept off as long as the vehicle is lifted

off the ground.

5. Remove the jack and tools.

08020101-122-001

Jack Components

3 — Wing Bolt

4 — Jack Screw

209

6. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking

position. For example, if changing the

right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

Removing A Tire

Warning!

Carefully follow these tire changing

warnings to help prevent personal injury or

damage to your vehicle:

Always park on a firm, level surface as

far from the edge of the roadway as

possible before raising the vehicle.

Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be raised.

Set the parking brake firmly and set the

transmission in PARK.

Do not let any passenger sit in the

vehicle when it is on a jack.

Do not get under the vehicle when it is

on a jack. If you need to get under a raised

vehicle, take it to a service center where it

can be raised on a lift.

Only use the jack in the positions

indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a

tire change.

If working on or near a roadway, be

extremely careful of motor traffic.

Proceed as follows:

1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them

counterclockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any lug nuts until the tire

has been raised off the ground.

2. Place the jack under the lift point

closest to the tire being changed with

the jack head squarely under the

jacking location.

3. Turn the jack screw in the direction

shown and adjust the jack head so that

it is close to the jacking location.

4. Continue raising the jack head

gradually by rotating the screw with

your hand until the jack head is inserted

into the lift point.

Caution!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by

jacking on locations other than those

indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this

vehicle.

08020300-121-001

Blocking Right Front Tire And Left

Rear Tire

08020301-123-001

Loosen Lug Nuts Counterclockwise

08020301-ALL-003

Raising The Jack

1 — Jack Head

210

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Insert the jack lever and attach the

lug wrench to tire jack.

Warning!

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is

dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the

jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.

Never get any part of your body under a

vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service

center where it can be raised on a lift.

6. Turn the jack handle clockwise and

raise the vehicle high enough so that

the tire is just raised off the ground and

can be removed. Before removing the

lug nuts, make sure your vehicle is

firmly in position and that it cannot slip

or move.

Warning!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary

can make the vehicle less stable. It could

slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.

Raise the vehicle only enough to remove

the tire.

7. Remove the lug nuts by turning

them counterclockwise, then remove

the wheel.

Locking Lug Nuts — If Equipped

If your vehicle has optional anti-theft

wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will

lock the tires and you must use a

special key to unlock them. This key will

attach to the lug wrench.

manufacturer by filling out the card

provided in the glove compartment and

mailing it in the accompanying

envelope. If you lose this key, contact

an authorized dealer or use the lock

manufacturer's order form, which is

with the registration card.

Accessory wheel locks cannot be used

on steel wheels. This includes situations

when the spare tire is installed. If the

spare tire is installed, one of the original

lug nuts (which should still be in the

vehicle) must be installed in place of the

wheel lock.

To Remove An Anti-theft Lug Nut

Proceed as follows:

1. Obtain the special key for the

anti-theft lug nut.

2. Place the special key on top of the

anti-theft lug nut, and be sure to hold

the key square to it. If you hold the key

at an angle, you may damage both key

and nut. Do not use a power impact

wrench.

3. Place the lug wrench on top of the

key and apply pressure. Turn the

wrench counterclockwise.

08020301-121-001

Front Jacking Location

08020301-ALL-006

Jack With Lug Wrench Attached

211

To Install The Anti-theft Lug Nut

Proceed as follows:

1. Place the special key on top of the

nut, and be sure to hold the key square

to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you

may damage both key and nut. Do not

use a power impact wrench.

2. Place the lug wrench on top of the

special key, apply pressure, and turn it

clockwise.

Mounting The Tire

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove dirt and grime from the

mounting surfaces of the wheel and

hub, including the hub bolts, with a

cloth.

2. Mount the tire and install the lug

nuts with the beveled edge inward, then

tighten them by hand.

Caution!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the

valve stem facing outward. The vehicle

could be damaged if the spare tire is

mounted incorrectly.

3. Turn the lug wrench

counterclockwise and lower the vehicle.

Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts

in the order shown.

Warning!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully

until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure

to follow this warning may result in serious

injury.

4. After tightening the lug nuts, have

them checked with a torque wrench by

your authorized dealer or service station

to verify correct tightness.

5. Remove the tire blocks and store

the tools and jack.

6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer

to “Recommended Tire Inflation

Pressure” in “Technical Specifications”

for more information.

With TPMS

Do not push the tire pressure

monitoring system set switch after

installing the spare tire. The switch is

only to be pushed after installing the

repaired flat tire or installing a

replacement tire.

Note: To prevent the jack and tool from

rattling, store them properly.

Warning!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

jack parts and the spare tire in the places

provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

08020303-XX4-001

Clean Mounting Surface

08020303-122-001

Lug Nut Tightening Order

212

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

TIRE SERVICE KIT

Tire Service Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located inside the

trunk.

The Tire Service Kit included with your

vehicle is for a temporary repair of a

slightly damaged flat tire resulting from

running over nails or similar sharp

objects on the road surface.

Perform the emergency flat tire repair

without removing the nail or similar

sharp object which punctured the tire.

Note: Your vehicle is not equipped with

a spare tire. In the event of a flat tire,

use the Tire Service Kit to repair the tire

temporarily. When doing the repair, refer

to the instructions included in the Tire

Service Kit. If an emergency repair was

performed on a flat tire using the Tire

Service Kit, contact an authorized

dealer to repair or replace the tire as

soon as possible.

Tire Service Kit

Components And

Operation

The Tire Service Kit includes the

following items:

U.S.A. And Canada Markets:

Mexico Market:

08020202-121-003

Tire Service Kit Location

08070606457457

Tire Service Kit Components —

U.S.A. And Canada Markets

1— Sealant Bottle

2— Compressor

3— Speed Restriction Sticker

4— Repaired Tire Sticker

5— Instructions

08070606456456

Tire Service Kit Components —

Mexico Markets

1— Tire Sealant

2— Compressor

3— Valve Core Tool

4— Injection Hose

5— Spare Valve Core

6— Speed Restriction Sticker

7— Instructions

213

Tire Service Usage

Precautions

The tire sealant cannot be reused. If the

sealant has been used, or is expired,

purchase new tire sealant at an

authorized dealer.

Note: The Tire Service Kit cannot be

used in the following cases. Consult an

authorized dealer if any of these

conditions exist:

The period of effective use for the

tire sealant has expired (the period of

effectiveness is indicated on the bottle

label)

The tear or puncture in the tire

exceeds about 0.16 inches (4 mm)

The damage has occurred to an

area of the tire other than the tread

The vehicle has been driven with

nearly no air remaining in the tire

The tire has come off the wheel rim

Damage to the wheel rim has

occurred

The tire has two or more punctures

Sealing A Tire With Tire

Service Kit

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side

of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid the danger of

being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the

vehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread is

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from driving

with extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from driving

on a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of the

tire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from open

flames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward

in a collision or hard stop could endanger

the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow

the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.

Failure to follow these warnings can result

in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,

your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents of

Tire Service Kit to come in contact with

hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit

sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or

absorbed through the skin. It causes skin,

eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush

immediately with plenty of water if there is

any contact with eyes or skin. Change

clothing as soon as possible, if there is any

contact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains

latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,

consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire

Service Kit out of reach of children. If

swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with

plenty of water and drink plenty of water.

Do not induce vomiting! Consult a

physician immediately.

U.S.A. And CANADA Markets:

Proceed as follows:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn

on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the

wheel with the deflated tire) is in a

position that is near to the ground. This

will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to

reach the valve stem and keep the Tire

Service Kit flat on the ground. This will

provide the best positioning of the kit

when injecting the sealant into the

deflated tire and running the air pump.

Move the vehicle as necessary to place

the valve stem in this position before

proceeding.

214

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE

for a manual transmission, and PARK

for automatic transmission.

4. Apply the parking brake with the

brake pedal pressed and turn the

engine OFF.

5. Unload passengers and cargo, then

remove the Tire Service Kit.

6. Gently shake the sealant bottle to

mix the contents. Then extend the

injection hose.

Note:

Do not shake the bottle

excessively. Otherwise, the sealant

could spray out of the injection hose. If

the sealant contacts clothing or other

objects, you may not be able to

remove it.

The sealant hardens easily, and

injecting it will be difficult under cold

weather conditions (32 °F (0 °C) or

below). Warm the sealant inside the

vehicle to facilitate injection.

7. Pull out the air compressor hose

and the air compressor plug from the

air compressor.

8. Install the air compressor hose,

which was pulled out of the air

compressor, into the injection valve of

the bottle.

08020202-121-003

Tire Service Kit Location

08020202-03A-666

Sealant Bottle With Injection Hose

1 — Injection Hose

08020202-36A-004

Air Compressor With Hose And

Plug

2 — Air Compressor Hose

215

Note: Make sure that the air

compressor switch is off before

inserting the air compressor hose into

the injection valve of the bottle. If the air

compressor hose is not installed to the

injection valve of the bottle securely, the

sealant may leak.

9. Remove the valve cap from the valve

of the flat tire, install the injection hose

to the tire valve, and turn the sleeve to

the right to tighten.

10. Install the bottle to the air

compressor and push it in until the left

and right tabs are engaged securely.

11. Insert the air compressor plug into

the accessory socket inside the vehicle

and place the ignition to ACC.

Note: When inserting the air

compressor plug into or removing it

from the accessory socket, make sure

that the air compressor switch is off.

When turning the air compressor on/off,

use the air compressor switch. Before

checking the tire inflation pressure using

the tire pressure gauge, tur n the air

compressor switch off.

12. The sealant is injected into the tire

when the air compressor is switched

on. After the sealant is injected

completely, wait until the tire inflation

pressure increases to the specified tire

inflation pressure. For the correct

pressure, check the tire inflation

pressure label on the driver's door

frame.

Note: The inflation pressure may

increase to about 43.5 psi (3 Bar)

temporarily to inject the sealant through

the valve. Normally, the inflation

pressure decreases gradually and it

reaches the actual inflation pressure

after about 30 seconds.

08020202-031-670

Install Air Compressor To Sealant

Bottle

3 — Air Compressor Hose

4 — Injection Valve

08020202-03A-004AB

Valve And Valve Cover

5 — Valve Cap

6 — Valve

08020202-031-669

Sealant Bottle Into Air Compressor

7 — Air Compressor Tabs

216

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Warning!

Never use the air compressor above 3 Bar

(43.5 psi). Using the air compressor at an

inflation pressure above 3 Bar (43.5 psi)

continuously is dangerous. If the air

compressor overheats, hot air will be

exhausted and you could get burned.

Caution!

If the tire inflation pressure does not

increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If

the tire does not reach the specified tire

inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may

have received extensive damage. In this

case, the repair using the tire service kit

was not successful.

Do not operate the air compressor for a

continuous 10 minutes or longer because

using it for long periods could cause a

malfunction.

13. Adhere the speed restriction sticker

to an area where it can be viewed easily

by the driver.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker

to the padded area on the steering wheel.

Adhering the speed restriction sticker to

the padded area on the steering wheel is

dangerous because the air bag may not

operate (deploy) normally resulting in

serious injury. In addition, do not adhere

the sticker to areas where warning lights or

the speedometer cannot be viewed.

14. Adhere the repaired tire sticker to

the wheel of the flat tire.

15. When the tire inflates to the

specified tire inflation pressure, tur n the

air compressor switch off, turn the

sleeve of the injection hose to the left,

and pull it out of the tire valve.

16. Remove the air compressor hose

from the injection valve of the bottle.

Then, install the injection hose to the

injection valve of the bottle to prevent

leakage of any remaining sealant.

Note: The remaining sealant in the

hose may spray out when the hose is

removed. Remove the hose carefully

because you may not be able to

remove the sealant contacting clothing

or other objects.

17. Install the tire valve cap.

18. Place the Tire Service Kit back into

its storage location.

19. Start driving immediately to spread

the sealant in the tire.

08020202-031-667

Repaired Tire Sticker

08020202-031-668

Install Injection Hose

To Sealant Bottle

217

Note: Carefully drive the vehicle at a

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If

the vehicle is driven at a speed of

50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle

may vibrate.

Note: With TPMS System: if the tire

is not properly inflated, the

warning

light will illuminate.

After driving the vehicle for about

10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect

the air compressor to the tire using

Step nine of the procedure, and check

the tire inflation pressure using the tire

pressure gauge on the air compressor.

If the tire inflation pressure is lower than

the specified tire inflation pressure, turn

the air compressor on and wait until it

reaches the specified tire inflation

pressure.

The Tire Service Kit is completed

successfully if the tire inflation pressure

does not decrease. Carefully drive the

vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer

immediately and have the flat tire

replaced. Replacement with a new tire

is recommended. If the tire is to be

repaired or reused, consult an

authorized dealer.

Note:

If an emergency flat tire repair has

been performed using the Tire Service

Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be

replaced with a new one as soon as

possible. If the tire is to be repaired or

reused, contact an authorized dealer.

The wheel can be reused if the

sealant adhering to it is removed.

However, replace the valve with a new

one.

Sealing A Tire With Tire

Service Kit

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side

of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid the danger of

being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the

vehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread is

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from driving

with extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from driving

on a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of the

tire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from open

flames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward

in a collision or hard stop could endanger

the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow

the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.

Failure to follow these warnings can result

in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,

your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents of

Tire Service Kit to come in contact with

hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit

sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or

absorbed through the skin. It causes skin,

eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush

immediately with plenty of water if there is

any contact with eyes or skin. Change

clothing as soon as possible, if there is any

contact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains

latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,

consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire

Service Kit out of reach of children. If

swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with

plenty of water and drink plenty of water.

Do not induce vomiting! Consult a

physician immediately.

218

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Mexico Market

Proceed as follows:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn

on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the

wheel with the deflated tire) is in a

position that is near to the ground. This

will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to

reach the valve stem and keep the Tire

Service Kit flat on the ground. This will

provide the best positioning of the kit

when injecting the sealant into the

deflated tire and running the air pump.

Move the vehicle as necessary to place

the valve stem in this position before

proceeding.

3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE

for a manual transmission, or PARK for

automatic transmission.

4. Apply the parking brake with the

brake pedal pressed and turn the

engine OFF.

5. Unload passengers and cargo, then

remove the Tire Service Kit.

6. Gently shake the tire sealant. If the

bottle is shaken after the injection hose

is screwed on, tire sealant could spray

out from the injection hose. Tire sealant

contacting clothing or other objects

may be impossible to remove. Shake

the bottle before screwing on the

injection hose.

Note:

Do not shake the bottle

excessively. Otherwise, the sealant

could spray out of the injection hose,

and if the sealant contacts clothing or

other objects, you may not be able to

remove it.

The sealant hardens easily and

injecting it will be difficult under cold

weather conditions 32 °F (0 °C) or

below. Warm the sealant inside the

vehicle to facilitate injection.

7. Remove the cap from the bottle and

screw on the injection hose with the

bottle's inner cap left on to break the

inner cap.

0802020203A003

Attaching Injection Hose

To Sealant Bottle

219

8. Remove the valve cap from the flat

tire. Push the back of a valve core tool

to the core of the tire valve and bleed

out all of the remaining air.

Note: If there is air remaining in the

tire when the valve core is removed, the

valve core could fly out. Remove the

valve core carefully.

9. Turn the valve core counter

clockwise with the valve core tool and

remove the valve core.

Note: Store the valve core in a place

where it will not get dirty.

10. Insert the injection hose into the

valve.

11. Hold the bottom of the bottle

upright, squeeze the bottle with your

hands, and inject the entire amount of

tire sealant into the tire.

12. Pull out the injection hose from the

valve.

08020202-03A-004AB

Valve And Valve Cover

5 — Valve Cap

6 — Tire Valve

08020202-03A-005AB

Turn Valve Core Counterclockwise

08020202-03A-008AB

Injection Hose Into Valve

08020202-03A-008

Squeeze Sealant Into Tire

08020202-03A-007AB

Turn Valve Core Clockwise To

Reinstall

220

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

13. Reinsert the valve core into the

valve and turn it clockwise to install.

Note:

The tire sealant cannot be reused.

If the tire sealant kit has been used, or

is expired, purchase new one at an

authorized dealer.

Do not throw away the empty tire

sealant bottle after use. Return the

empty tire sealant bottle to an

authorized dealer when replacing the

tire. The empty tire sealant bottle will

need to be used to extract and

dispose of the used sealant from the

tire.

14. Install the injection hose to the tab

of the bottle to prevent leakage of any

remaining sealant.

15. Adhere the speed restriction sticker

to an area where it can be viewed easily

by the driver.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker

to the padded area on the steering wheel.

Adhering the speed restriction sticker to

the padded area on the steering wheel is

dangerous because the air bag may not

operate (deploy) normally resulting in

serious injury. In addition, do not adhere

the sticker to areas where warning lights or

the speedometer cannot be viewed.

16. Pull out the air compressor hose

and the air compressor plug from the

air compressor.

17. Install the air compressor hose to

the tire valve.

18. Insert the air compressor plug into

the accessory socket inside the vehicle

and place the ignition to ACC.

19. Turn the air compressor switch on

and inflate the tire carefully to the

correct inflation pressure. For the

correct pressure, check the tire inflation

pressure label on the driver's door

frame.

Note: When inserting the air

compressor plug into or removing it

from the accessory socket, make sure

that the air compressor switch is off.

When turning the air compressor on/off,

use the air compressor switch. Before

checking the tire inflation pressure using

the tire pressure gauge, tur n the air

compressor switch off.

Caution!

If the tire inflation pressure does not

increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If

the tire does not reach the specified tire

inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may

have received extensive damage. In this

case, the repair using the tire service kit

was not successful.

Do not operate the air compressor for a

continuous 10 minutes or longer because

using it for long periods could cause a

malfunction.

08020202-36A-004

Air Compressor With Hose And

Plug

2 — Air Compressor Hose

08020202-03A-00BAB

Air Compressor Hose Into Valve

221

Note: If the tire has been over

inflated, loosen the screw cap on the air

compressor and bleed some of the air

out.

20. When the tire inflates to the

specified tire inflation pressure, tur n the

air compressor switch off, turn the

sleeve of the air compressor hose to

the left, and pull it out of the tire valve.

21. Install the tire valve cap.

22. Place the Tire Service Kit back into

its storage location.

23. Start driving immediately to spread

the sealant in the tire.

Note:

Carefully drive the vehicle at a

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If

the vehicle is driven at a speed of

50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle

may vibrate.

With TPMS System: if the tire is

not properly inflated, the

warning

light will illuminate.

After driving the vehicle for about

10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect

the air compressor to the tire using

step nine of the procedure, and check

the tire inflation pressure using the tire

pressure gauge on the air compressor.

If the tire inflation pressure is lower

than the specified tire inflation

pressure, turn the air compressor on

and wait until it reaches the specified

tire inflation pressure;

The emergency flat tire repair is

completed successfully if the tire

inflation pressure does not decrease.

Carefully drive the vehicle to the

nearest authorized dealer and have the

flat tire replaced. Replacement with a

new tire is recommended. If the tire is

to be repaired or reused, contact a

authorized dealer.

If an emergency flat tire repair has

been performed using the Tire Service

Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be

replaced with a new one as soon as

possible. If the tire is to be repaired or

reused, contact an authorized dealer.

The tire can be reused if the sealant

adhering to it is removed. However,

replace the valve with a new one.

Replacing The Bottle

Note: The tire sealant has a period of

effective use. Check the period of

effective use indicated on the bottle

labelanddonotuseitifithasexpired.

Have the tire sealant replaced at an

authorized dealer before the period of

effective use has expired.

Inspect the Tire Service Kit at regular

intervals as well as the operation of the

tire compressor.

222

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

JUMP STARTING

Preparations For Jump

Starting

If the battery is discharged, a jump

starting procedure can be performed

using the battery and the cables of

another vehicle, or using a booster

battery.

Jump starting is dangerous if done

incorrectly, so follow the procedure in

this section carefully. If you feel unsure

about jump starting, it is strongly

recommended that you have a

competent service technician do the

work.

Note: When a booster battery is being

used, comply with the utilization and

precaution instructions specified by the

manufacturer.

Warning!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery

is frozen. It could rupture or explode and

cause personal injury.

Caution!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack

or any other booster source with a system

voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to

the battery, starter motor, alternator or

electrical system may occur.

08030100121001

Jump Start Locations

223

Jump-Starting

Procedure

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump starting

procedure could result in personal injury or

property damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures could

result in damage to the charging system of

the booster vehicle or the discharged

vehicle.

To jump start the vehicle, follow this

procedure:

1. Remove the positive terminal cover.

2. Make sure the booster battery is

12 Volts and that the negative terminal

is grounded.

3. Turn off the engine of the vehicle

with the booster battery and all

unnecessary electrical loads in both

vehicles.

Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other

as this could establish a ground

connection and personal injury could

result.

4. Connect the positive end of the

jumper cable to the positive terminal on

the discharged battery.

5. Connect the opposite end of the

positive jumper cable to the positive

terminal on the booster battery.

6. Connect the negative end of the

negative jumper cable to the negative

terminal of the booster battery.

7. Connect the opposite end of the

negative jumper cable to a good engine

ground of the vehicle with the

discharged battery (exposed metal part

of the engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

8. Start the engine of the booster

vehicle and run it a few minutes. Then

start the engine of the other vehicle.

9. Once the engine is started, remove

the jumper cables in the reverse

sequence.

10. Replace the positive terminal cover.

Make sure cover is secure.

Bump Starting

Never jump start the engine by pushing,

towing or coasting downhill.

Note:

You cannot start a vehicle with an

automatic transmission by pushing it.

Do not push-start a vehicle that has

a manual transmission. It can damage

the emission control system.

08030100-122-001

Positive Terminal Cover

224

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Starting A Flooded

Engine

If the engine fails to start, it may be

flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).

Follow this procedure:

1. If the engine does not start within

5 seconds on the first try, wait

10 seconds and try again.

2. Make sure the parking brake is on.

3. Press the accelerator all the way and

hold it there.

4. Press the clutch pedal (manual

transmission) or the brake pedal

(automatic transmission), then push the

push button start. If the engine starts,

release the accelerator immediately

because the engine will suddenly rev

up.

5. If the engine fails to start, crank it

without pressing the accelerator.

If the engine still does not start using

the above procedure, have your vehicle

inspected an authorized dealer.

IF YOUR ENGINE

OVERHEATS

If Your Engine Overheats

In any of the following situations, you

can reduce the potential for overheating

by taking the appropriate action.

On highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, place

the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do

not increase engine idle speed.

Note: There are steps that you can

take to slow down an impending

overheat condition:

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on,

turn it off. The A/C system adds heat

to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove

this heat.

You can also turn the temperature

control to maximum heat, the mode

control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to

act as a supplement to the radiator

and aids in removing heat from the

engine cooling system.

Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to

cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator or coolant

bottle is hot.

Caution!

Driving with a hot cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge

reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle.

Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner

turned off until the pointer drops back into

the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,

and call for service.

225

If Steam Is Coming From The

Engine Compartment:

Do not go near the front of the vehicle.

Stop the engine. Wait until the steam

dissipates, then open the hood and

start the engine.

If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is

Escaping:

Open the hood and idle the engine until

it cools.

Note:

If the cooling fan does not operate

while the engine is running, the engine

temperature will increase. Stop the

engine and contact an authorized

dealer.

If the engine continues to overheat

or frequently overheats, have the

cooling system inspected. The engine

could be seriously damaged unless

repairs are made. Contact an

authorized dealer.

TOWING THE

VEHICLE

Attaching The Tow Eyes

— If Equipped

Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with

tow eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye.

Chains may break, causing serious injury or

death.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye.

Tow straps may break or become

disengaged, causing serious injury or

death.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usage

may cause components to break resulting

in serious injury or death.

Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusively

for roadside assistance operations. Only

use the tow eye with an appropriate device

in accordance with the highway code (a

rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for

a short distance to the nearest service

location.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow

vehicles off the road or where there are

obstacles.

In compliance with the above

conditions, towing with a tow eye must

take place with two vehicles (one towing,

the other towed) aligned as much as

possible along the same center line.

Damage to your vehicle may occur if these

guidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that can

tow vehicles with low ground clearances as

extensive damage can result by using a

standard tow truck platform.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the towing eyelet and the

lug wrench from the luggage

compartment.

2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or

similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent

damage to a painted bumper, and open

the cap located on the front or rear

bumper.

226

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Note: Do not use excessive force as it

may damage the cap or scratch the

painted bumper surface. Remove the

cap completely and store it so as not to

lose it.

3. Securely install the tow eye in front

or rear using the lug wrench or

equivalent.

4. Hook the towing rope to the tow

eye.

Caution!

Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to

rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not

use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or

highway towing. You could damage your

vehicle.

When using the tow eyes, always pull

the lead or chain in a straight direction

with respect to the eyelet. Never apply

a sideways force.

Note: Follow the precautions below to

avoid damage to the towing eyelet and

towing hook, vehicle body, or

transmission system when towing:

Do not tow a vehicle heavier than

yours.

Do not suddenly accelerate your

vehicle as it will apply a severe shock

to the tow eye and towing hook or

rope.

Do not attach any rope other than

to the tow eye and towing hook.

08060203-121-001AB

Front Bumper Cap Location

1— Front Bumper Cap

08060203-122-001AB

Rear Bumper Cap Location

08060201-121-001AB

Installing Front Towing Eye

08060201-122-001AB

Installing Rear Tow Eye

227

Emergency Towing

Towing Description

Proper lifting and towing are necessary

to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Government and local laws must be

followed.

A towed vehicle usually should have its

drive wheels (rear wheels) OFF of the

ground. If excessive damage or other

conditions prevent this, use wheel

dollies.

When towing with the rear wheels on

the ground, release the parking brake.

Caution!

DO NOT use sling-type equipment when

towing. When securing the vehicle to a

flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear

suspension components. Damage to your

vehicle may result from improper towing.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, the vehicle may be towed

with all four wheels on the ground using

the towing hook at the front of the

vehicle. Only tow the vehicle on paved

surfaces for short distances at low

speeds.

Follow these instructions when towing

the vehicle with all wheels on the

ground:

1. Shift to NEUTRAL for manual

transmission or automatic transmission.

2. Place the ignition to ACC.

3. Release the parking brake.

Note: Remember that power assist for

the brakes and steering will not be

available when the engine is not

running.

EVENT DATA

RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event

Data Recorder (EDR). The main

purpose of an EDR is to record data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed under

certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint

Systems” in “Safety” for further

information on the Event Data Recorder

(EDR).

228

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION.............230

ENGINE COMPARTMENT ......236

BATTERY RECHARGING .......240

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . .240

RAISING THE VEHICLE ........242

WHEELS AND TIRES..........243

DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......259

STORINGTHEVEHICLE .......260

BODYWORK ...............260

INTERIORS ................261

229

INTRODUCTION

Be extremely careful and prevent injury

to yourself and others or damage to

your vehicle when using this Owner’s

Manual for inspection and maintenance.

If you are unsure about any procedure it

describes, we strongly urge you to have

a reliable and qualified service shop

perform the work, preferably at your

authorized dealer.

Factory-trained FCA technicians and

genuine FCA parts are best for your

vehicle. Without this expertise and the

parts that have been designed and

made especially for your vehicle,

inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient

servicing may result in problems. This

could lead to vehicle damage or an

accident and injuries.

For expert advice and quality service,

contact your authorized dealer.

Note: Under no circumstances should

oil change intervals exceed 10,000

miles (16,000 kilometers) or 1 year.

To continue New Vehicle Limited

Warranty eligibility and to protect your

investment, it is your responsibility to

properly maintain your vehicle

according to factory recommended

schedules outlined in this Owner’s

Manual. As part of this you must keep

your maintenance records, receipts,

repair orders and any other documents

as evidence this maintenance was

performed. You must present these

documents, should any New Vehicle

Limited Warranty coverage

disagreement occur. Failure to do so

can result in your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty being voided either in whole

or in part.

This evidence may consist of the

following:

The FCA Scheduled Maintenance

Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet,

must be completely filled out showing

mileage, repair order number, date for

each service, and signed by a qualified

automotive service technician who

service vehicles.

Original copies of repair orders or

other receipts that include the mileage

and date the vehicle was serviced.

Each receipt should be signed by a

qualified automotive service technician.

For self maintenance, a statement

that you completed the maintenance

yourself, displaying mileage and the

date the work was performed. Also,

receipts for the replacement parts (fluid,

filters, etc.) indicating the date and

mileage must accompany this

statement.

Note: If you elect to perform

maintenance yourself or have your

vehicle serviced at a location other than

an authorized dealer, FCA requires that

all fluids, parts and materials must meet

FCA standards for durability and

performance as described in this

Owner’s Manual.

Claims against the warranty resulting

from lack of maintenance, as opposed

to defective materials or authorized FCA

workmanship, will not be honored.

Any auto repair shop using parts

equivalent to your vehicle's original

equipment may perform maintenance.

But we recommend that it always be

done by an authorized dealer using

genuine FCA parts. Selecting

“Maintenance Monitor” enables the

system to notify you of your vehicle's

approaching inspection/servicing

period.

Owner Maintenance

Precautions

The owner or a qualified service

technician should make these vehicle

inspections at the indicated intervals to

ensure safe and dependable operation.

Bring any problem to the attention of an

authorized dealer or qualified service

technician as soon as possible.

When refueling perform inspection

of:

Brake and clutch fluid level

Engine coolant level

Engine oil level

Washer fluid level

230

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

At least monthly perform inspection

of:

Tire inflation pressures

At least twice a year (for example,

every spring and fall) perform

inspection of:

Engine coolant

Engine oil

As explained in the “Introduction”

paragraph, several procedures can be

done only by a qualified service

technician with special tools.

For details, read the separate Warranty

Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you

are unsure about any servicing or

maintenance procedure, have it done

by an authorized dealer.

There are strict environmental laws

regarding the disposal of waste oil and

fluids. Please dispose of your waste

properly and with due regard to the

environment.

We recommend that you entrust the oil

and fluid changes of your vehicle to an

authorized dealer.

Periodic Checks

Every 620 miles (1,000 km) or before

long trips check and, if necessary, top

off:

Engine coolant level.

Brake fluid level.

Windshield washer fluid level.

Tire inflation pressure and condition.

Operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazard

warning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshield

washer/wiper system and

positioning/wear of windshield wiper

blades.

Every 1860 miles (3,000 km) check

and top off the engine oil level if

required.

Heavy-Duty Use Of The

Vehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of the

following conditions:

Dusty roads.

Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 -

5 miles (7-8km)atsub-zero outside

temperatures.

Engine idling for long periods of time

or driving long distances at low speeds

or long periods of inactivity.

The following checks must be carried

out more often than indicated in the

Scheduled Servicing Plan:

Check front disc brake pad condition

and wear.

Check cleanliness of underhood area

and all door and trunk locks, cleanliness

and lubrication of linkage.

Visually inspect conditions of the:

engine, transmission, lines and hoses

(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and

rubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.).

Check battery charge and battery

fluid level.

Visually inspect conditions of the

accessory drive belts.

Check and, if necessary, change

engine oil and replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace

cabin air filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace air

cleaner.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles

(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a

dusty and off road environment or is

operated predominately at idle or only

very low engine RPM’s. This type of

vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

231

Scheduled Servicing

Plan

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check tire condition/wear

and adjust pressure,

if necessary, check

TIREKIT expiration date

(if provided).

•••••••••••••••

Check operation of lighting

system (headlamps,

direction indicators, hazard

warning lights, luggage

compartment, passenger

compartment, glove

compartment, instrument

panel warning lights, etc.).

•••••••••••••••

Check and, if necessary,

top up fluid levels

(brakes/hydraulic clutch,

windshield washer, battery,

engine coolant, etc.).

•••••••••••••••

232

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check engine control

system operation

(via diagnostic tool).

•••••••••••••••

Visually inspect condition

of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection,

pipes and hoses (exhaust -

fuel system - brakes),

rubber elements (boots,

sleeves, bushings, etc.).

•••• • • •

Visually inspect conditions

of steering elements and

check their operation.

•••• • • •

Check the front and rear

suspension, tie rods, CV

Joints, and replace if

necessary.

•••• • • •

Check endfloat of wheel

bearings.

•••• • • •

233

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check windshield/rear

window wiper blade

position/wear.

•• ••• • • •

Check operation of

windshield washer system

and adjust jets if

necessary.

•• ••• • • •

Check cleanliness of hood

and trunk locks and

cleanliness and lubrication

of linkages.

•• ••• • • •

Check parking brake lever

travel and adjust, if

necessary.

•••••••••••••••

Visually check the

condition and wear of the

front and rear brakes.

•••••••••••••••

Visually inspect condition

of evaporation control

system.

••• • •

234

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Visual inspect the

condition and tensioning

of the accessory drive belt.

•• •

Replace the accessory

drive belt.

****

•

Inspect and replace PCV

valve if necessary.

•

Change engine oil and

replace oil filter.

In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first.

Replace spark plugs

(1.4L Turbo engine).

••• • •

****Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads.

*The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one

year.

**The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to

the engine:

Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “Technical

Specifications” for further information).

Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement.

Contact your authorized dealer if you have any questions.

235

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace engine air filter.# ••• • •

Replace Cabin Air Filter –

If Equipped.

***

•••• • • •

Flush and replace the

engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) whichever

comes first.

••

Replace the timing belt

(1.4L Turbo Engine).

•

#The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.

***Replace every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or two years. Replacement every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or one year in dusty conditions or as optional/suggested

replacement.

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right

equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.

This could cause an accident.

236

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Checking Levels

07030300-121-003

1 — Window Washer Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir

3 — Engine Oil Cap 6 — Battery

237

Engine Oil

Warning!

Be very careful when working in the

engine compartment when the engine is

hot: you may get burned.

Do not get too close to the radiator

cooling fan: the electric fan may start;

danger of injury.

Loose clothing might be pulled by

moving parts.

Recommended Oil

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in

“Technical Specifications” for further

information.

Inspecting engine oil level

Proceed as follows:

1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level

surface.

2. Warm up the engine to normal

operating temperature.

3. Turn it off and wait at least five

minutes for the oil to return to the

sump.

4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,

and reinsert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and

examine the level. The level is normal if

it is between Low and Full. If it is near

or below Low, open the engine oil

cap/filler 2 and add enough oil to bring

the level to Full.

Note: Do not overfill the engine oil.

This may cause engine damage.

6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick

is positioned properly before reinserting

the dipstick.

7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Engine oil consumption

During the initial period of use the

engine oil consumption conditions

should stabilize after the first 3000 –

3500 miles (5000 – 6000 km).

Engine Coolant

Warning!

Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan

motor lead before working near the radiator

cooling fan.

You or others can be badly burned by

hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam

from your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to

cool. Never open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator or coolant

bottle is hot.

Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry

away from the radiator cooling fan when

the hood is raised. The fan starts

automatically and may start at any time,

whether the engine is running or not.

When working near the radiator cooling

fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn

the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is

temperature controlled and can start at any

time the ignition is in the ON mode.

You or others can be badly burned by

hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam

from your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to

cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

07030403-121-001

Engine Compartment

1 — Engine Oil Dipstick

2 — Engine Oil Cap

238

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Inspecting Coolant Level

Note: Changing the coolant should be

done by your authorized dealer.

Inspect the antifreeze protection and

coolant level in the coolant reservoir at

least once a year, at the beginning of

the winter season, and before traveling

where temperatures may drop below

freezing.

Inspect the condition and connections

of all cooling system and heater hoses.

Replace any that are worn or

deteriorated.

Warning!

Do not open hot engine cooling system.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when

the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or

remove the cap to cool an overheated

engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in

the cooling system. To prevent scalding or

injury, do not remove the pressure cap

while the system is hot or under pressure.

Do not use a pressure cap other than

the one specified for your vehicle. Personal

injury or engine damage may result.

The coolant should be at full in the

radiator and between the F (Full) and L

(Low) marks on the coolant reservoir

when the engine is cool.

If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant by

mixing a minimum solution of 50%

Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate

for FIAT Spider. Use higher

concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if

temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are

anticipated. Bring the level to F (Full).

Please contact your authorized dealer

for assistance.

Securely tighten the coolant reservoir

tank cap after adding coolant.

If the coolant reservoir is empty or new

coolant is required frequently, contact

your authorized dealer.

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level

The brakes and clutch draw fluid

from the same reservoir.

Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir

regularly.

It should be kept between the MAX

and MIN lines.

The level normally drops with

accumulated use, a condition

associated with wear of brake and

clutch linings. If it is excessively low,

have the brake/clutch system

inspected. Contact your authorized

dealer.

07030501-121-001

Coolant Reservoir

07030601-121-002

Brake Fluid Reservoir

239

Warning!

Use only manufacturer's recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”

in “Technical Specifications” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake

fluid can severely damage your brake

system and/or impair its performance. The

proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is

also identified on the original factory

installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

To avoid contamination from foreign

matter or moisture, use only new brake

fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly

closed container. Keep the master cylinder

reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture

from the air resulting in a lower boiling

point. This may cause it to boil

unexpectedly during hard or prolonged

braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can

result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine

parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.

Brake fluid can also damage painted and

vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to

avoid its contact with these surfaces.

Do not allow petroleum based fluid to

contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal

components could be damaged, causing

partial or complete brake failure. This could

result in a collision.

Windshield And

Headlight Washer Fluid

Inspecting Washer Fluid Level

Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir, open the cap and add fluid if

necessary.

Use plain water if washer fluid is

unavailable. But use only washer fluid in

cold weather to prevent it from freezing.

Automatic Transmission

Control Unit

The transmission oil level should only be

checked at your authorized dealer.

Battery Maintenance

To get the best service from a battery:

Keep it securely mounted.

Keep the top clean and dry.

Keep terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

Rinse off spilled electrolyte

immediately with a solution of water

and baking soda.

If the vehicle will not be used for an

extended time, disconnect the battery

leads and charge the battery every six

weeks.

Battery Replacement

Contact your authorized dealer to

purchase a replacement battery.

Warning!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution

and can burn or even blind you. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,

skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery

when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in

eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately

with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.

Keep flame or sparks away from the

battery. Do not use a booster battery or

any other booster source with an output

greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after handling.

07030901-121-001

Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

240

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

BATTERY

RECHARGING

BATTERY CHARGING

PROCEDURE

Warning!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution

and can burn or even blind you. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,

skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery

when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in

eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately

with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.

Keep flame or sparks away from the

battery. Do not use a booster battery or

any other booster source with an output

greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Caution!

It is essential when replacing the cables

on the battery that the positive cable is

attached to the positive post and the

negative cable is attached to the negative

post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)

and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight

on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.

If a “fast charger” is used while the

battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both

vehicle battery cables before connecting

the charger to the battery. Do not use a

“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Charge battery as follows:

Before recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and turn the engine off

by placing the ignition in the OFF mode.

Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

Connect the charger cables to the

battery terminals, observing the polarity

(+,–).

Turn on the charger.

When finished, turn the charger off

before disconnecting the battery.

Reconnect the negative battery

terminal.

MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES

The following pages contain

instructions on the required

maintenance from the technical

personnel who designed the vehicle.

In addition to these specific

maintenance instructions specified for

routine scheduled servicing, there are

other components which may require

periodic maintenance or replacement

over the vehicle’s life cycle.

Body Lubrication

Ensure that the locks and bodywork

junction points, including components

such as the seat guides, door hinges

(and rollers), trunk and hood are

periodically lubricated with lithium

based grease to ensure correct, silent

operation and to protect them from rust

and wear.

Thoroughly clean the components,

eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.

After lubricating, eliminate excess oil

and grease. Also pay particular

attention to the hood closing devices,

to ensure correct operation.

During operations on the hood, be sure

to perform with the engine cold, also

remember to check, clean and lubricate

the locking, release and safety devices.

Make sure the hood's secondary latch

keeps the hood from opening when the

primary latch is released.

241

Lubricate the external lock cylinders

twice a year. Apply a small amount of

high-quality lubricant directly into the

lock cylinder. If necessary, contact your

authorized dealer.

Wiper Blades

Contamination of either the windshield

or the blades with foreign matter can

reduce wiper effectiveness. Common

sources are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some

commercial car washes.

If the blades are not wiping properly,

clean the window and blades with a

good cleaner or mild detergent; then

rinse thoroughly with clean water.

Repeat if necessary.

When the wiper lever is in the AUTO

position and the ignition is placed in the

ON mode, the wipers may move

automatically in the following cases:

If the windshield above the rain

sensor is touched.

If the windshield above the rain

sensor is wiped with a cloth.

If the windshield is struck with a hand

or other object.

If the rain sensor is struck with a

hand or other object from inside the

vehicle.

Note:

Hot waxes applied by automatic car

washers have been known to affect

the wiper's ability to clean windows.

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gas, paraffin, paint

thinner, or other solvents on or near

them.

Be careful not to pinch hands or

fingers as it may cause injury, or

damage the wipers. When washing or

servicing the vehicle, make sure the

wiper lever is in the OFF position.

Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades

When the wipers no longer clean well,

the blades are probably worn or

cracked. Replace them.

When raising both windshield wiper

arms, raise the driver's side wiper arm

first.

When lowering the wiper arms, slowly

lower the wiper arm from the

passenger's side first while supporting

it with your hand. Forcefully lowering

the wiper arms could damage the wiper

arm and blade, and may scratch or

crack the windshield.

Note: To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do not try

to sweep the wiper arm by hand.

Blade Replacement

Proceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Open the clip and slide the blade

assembly in the direction of the arrow.

3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove

it from the arm.

07031101-36A-001

Clip

07031101-36A-002

Blade Assembly and Arm

242

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Warning!

To prevent damage to the windshield let

the wiper arm down easily, do not let it slap

down on the windshield.

4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide

it out of blade holder.

5. Remove the metal stiffeners from

each blade rubber and install them in

the new blade.

6. Carefully insert the new blade

rubber. Then install the blade assembly

in the reverse order of removal.

RAISING THE

VEHICLE

If the vehicle needs to be raised, see an

authorized dealer which is equipped

with arm hoists or workshop lifts.

The vehicle’s lifting points are marked

on the side skirts with the

symbols.

07031101-36A-003

Blade Holder

07031101-36A-004

Metal Stiffeners

07031101-36A-005

Reassemble Blade

243

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover

aspects of the following information:

Tire Markings, Tire Identification

Numbers, Tire Terminology and

Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire

Tire Markings

Note:

P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is

based on U.S. design standards.

P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the

size designation. Example:

P215/65R15 95H.

European — Metric tire sizing is

based on European design standards.

Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall

beginning with the section width. The

letter "P" is absent from this tire size

designation. Example: 215/

65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing

is based on U.S. design standards.

The size designation for LT-Metric tires

is the same as for P-Metric tires except

for the letters “LT” that are molded into

the sidewall preceding the size

designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designed

for temporary emergency use only.

Temporary high pressure compact

spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”

molded into the sidewall preceding the

size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based on

U.S. design standards and it begins

with the tire diameter molded into the

sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

0601085395US

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT

Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum

Load

2 — Size

Designation

5 — Maximum

Pressure

3 — Service

Description

6 — Treadwear,

Traction and

Temperature

Grades

244

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P =

Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

245

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 =

Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,

vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

246

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white

sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the

outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it

on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT =

Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for

highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.

Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

247

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar

The

vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front

door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting

for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds

per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation

pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the

tire placard.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading

capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation

pressures.

248

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Note: The proper cold tire inflation

pressure is listed on the driver’s side

B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's

side door.

Tire And Loading Information

Placard

This placard tells you important

information about the:

1. Number of people that can be

carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the

front, rear, and spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire

must not exceed the load carrying

capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire's load carrying

capacity if you adhere to the loading

conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire

and Loading Information placard in

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And

Operating” section of this manual.

Note: Under a maximum loaded

vehicle condition, gross axle weight

ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded.

For further information on GAWRs,

vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer

to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading

conditions of your vehicle, locate the

statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never

exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire

and Loading Information placard. The

combined weight of occupants,

cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight

(if applicable) should never exceed the

weight referenced here.

0806115150US

Example Tire Placard Location

(Door)

0806115151US

Example Tire Placard Location

(B-Pillar)

GUID-054900418-high.tif

Tire And Loading Information

Placard

249

Steps For Determining Correct

Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's

placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX

kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For

example, if “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals

635 kg and there will be five 68 kg

passengers in your vehicle, the amount

of available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =

295 kg) as shown in step 4.

Note:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. The following table

shows examples on how to calculate

total load, cargo/luggage, and towing

capacities of your vehicle with varying

seating configurations and number and

size of occupants. This table is for

illustration purposes only and may not

be accurate for the seating and load

carry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, the

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

250

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use

tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

GUID-054900419-high.tif

251

Tires — General

Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential

to the safe and satisfactory operation of

your vehicle. Four primary areas are

affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety and Vehicle Stability

Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort

Safety

Warning!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous

and can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing and

can result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to

cushion shock. Objects on the road and

chuckholes can cause damage that result

in tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires can

affect vehicle handling and can fail

suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle

control.

Unequal tire pressures can cause

steering problems. You could lose control

of your vehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side of

the vehicle to the other can cause the

vehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the

recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation

affect the stability of the vehicle and can

produce a feeling of sluggish response

or over responsiveness in the steering.

Note:

Unequal tire pressures from side to

side may cause erratic and

unpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to

side may cause the vehicle to drift left

or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire

rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel

consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause abnormal wear patterns and

reduced tread life, resulting in the need

for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a

comfortable ride. Over-inflation

produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is

listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear

edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with a

good quality pocket-type pressure

gauge. Do not make a visual judgement

when determining proper inflation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when

they are under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or

visible damage.

Caution!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure, always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt

from entering the valve stem, which could

damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the

placard are always “cold tire inflation

pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is

defined as the tire pressure after the

vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of

three hours. The cold tire inflation

pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into

the tire sidewall.

252

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Check tire pressures more often if

subject to a wide range of outdoor

temperatures, as tire pressures vary

with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately

1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air

temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a

garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F

(20°C) and the outside temperature =

32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation

pressure should be increased by 3 psi

(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for

every 12°F (7°C) for this outside

temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to

6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO

NOT reduce this normal pressure build

up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed

Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at

safe speeds and within posted speed

limits. Where speed limits or conditions

are such that the vehicle can be driven

at high speeds, maintaining correct tire

inflation pressure is very important.

Increased tire pressure and reduced

vehicle loading may be required for

high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to

your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds,

loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle under

maximum load is dangerous. The added

strain on your tires could cause them to

fail. You could have a serious collision. Do

not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum

capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

Warning!

Combining radial ply tires with other types

of tires on your vehicle will cause your

vehicle to handle poorly. The instability

could cause a collision. Always use radial

ply tires in sets of four. Never combine

them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may

be repaired if it meets the following

criteria:

The tire has not been driven on when

flat.

The damage is only on the tread

section of your tire (sidewall damage is

not repairable).

The puncture is no greater than a ¼

of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire

repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat

tires that have experienced a loss of

pressure should be replaced

immediately with another Run Flat tire

of identical size and service description

(Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to

drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph

(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is

referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run

Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation

pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).

Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat

mode it has limited driving capabilities

and needs to be replaced immediately.

A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle

loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer

while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section

for more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice

conditions, do not spin your vehicle's

wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously

without stopping.

253

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A

tire could explode and injure someone. Do

not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than

30 seconds continuously when you are

stuck, and do not let anyone near a

spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original

equipment tires to help you in

determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the

bottom of the tread grooves. They will

appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).

When the tread is worn to the tread

wear indicators, the tire should be

replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires”

in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent

upon varying factors including, but not

limited to:

Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tire

inflation pressures can cause uneven

wear patterns to develop across the tire

tread. These abnormal wear patterns

will reduce tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speed

rating of V or higher, and Summer tires

typically have a reduced tread life.

Rotation of these tires per the vehicle

maintenance schedule is highly

recommended.

Warning!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced

after six years, regardless of the remaining

tread. Failure to follow this warning can

result in sudden tire failure. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry

place with as little exposure to light as

possible. Protect tires from contact with

oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a

balance of many characteristics. They

should be inspected regularly for wear

and correct cold tire inflation pressures.

The manufacturer strongly recommends

that you use tires equivalent to the

originals in size, quality and

performance when replacement is

needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section.

Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle

Certification Label for the size

designation of your tire. The Load Index

and Speed Symbol for your tire will be

found on the original equipment tire

sidewall.

0806104865NA

Tire Tread

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

254

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

See the Tire Sizing Chart example

found in the “Tire Safety Information”

section of this manual for more

information relating to the Load Index

and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two

front tires or two rear tires as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you

ever replace a wheel, make sure that

the wheel’s specifications match those

of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your

authorized tire dealer or original

equipment dealer with any questions you

may have on tire specifications or

capability. Failure to use equivalent

replacement tires may adversely affect the

safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,

or speed rating other than that specified for

your vehicle. Some combinations of

unapproved tires and wheels may change

suspension dimensions and performance

characteristics, resulting in changes to

steering, handling, and braking of your

vehicle. This can cause unpredictable

handling and stress to steering and

suspension components. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death. Use only the tire and

wheel sizes with load ratings approved for

your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller load

index or capacity, other than what was

originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a

tire with a smaller load index could result in

tire overloading and failure. You could lose

control and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires

having adequate speed capability can

result in sudden tire failure and loss of

vehicle control.

Caution!

Replacing original tires with tires of a

different size may result in false

speedometer and odometer readings.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all

seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and

Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All

season tires can be identified by the

M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling

of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires

— If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet

and dry conditions, and are not intended

to be driven in snow or on ice. If your

vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,

be aware these tires are not designed for

Winter or cold driving conditions. Install

Winter tires on your vehicle when

ambient temperatures are less than 40°F

(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or

snow. For more information, contact an

authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all

season designation or mountain/

snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

Use Summer tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice

conditions. You could lose vehicle control,

resulting in severe injury or death. Driving

too fast for conditions also creates the

possibility of loss of vehicle control.

255

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the

use of snow tires during the Winter.

Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the

tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires,

select tires equivalent

in size and type to the

original equipment

tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four;

failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling

of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed

ratings than what was originally

equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds

over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds

above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer for recommended safe operating

speeds, loading and cold tire inflation

pressures.

While studded tires improve

performance on ice, skid and traction

capability on wet or dry surfaces may

be poorer than that of non-studded

tires. Some states prohibit studded

tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

Spare Tires —

If Equipped

Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire

Service Kit instead of a spare tire,

please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In

Case Of Emergency” for further

information.

Caution!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,

do not take your vehicle through an

automatic car wash with a compact or

limited use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original

Equipped Tire And Wheel —

If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

spare tire and wheel equivalent in look

and function to the original equipment

tire and wheel found on the front or rear

axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may

be used in the tire rotation for your

vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the

recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire —

If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary

emergency use only. You can identify if

your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare

tire description on the Tire and Loading

Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the

sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire

descriptions begin with the letter “T” or

“S” preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T,S=Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the

original equipment tire should be

repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on

your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt

to mount a conventional tire on the

compact spare wheel, since the wheel

is designed specifically for the compact

spare tire. Do not install more than one

compact spare tire and wheel on the

vehicle at any given time.

256

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Warning!

Compact and collapsible spares are for

temporary emergency use only. With these

spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have

limited tread life. When the tread is worn to

the tread wear indicators, the temporary

use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be

sure to follow the warnings, which apply to

your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Collapsible Spare Tire —

If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary

emergency use only. You can identify if

your vehicle is equipped with a

collapsible spare by looking at the

spare tire description on the Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on

the driver’s side door opening or on the

sidewall of the tire.

Collapsible spare tire description

example: 165/80-17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the

original equipment tire should be

repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on

your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Inflate collapsible tire only after the

wheel is properly installed to the

vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using

the electric air pump before lowering

the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt

to mount a conventional tire on the

collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel

is designed specifically for the

collapsible spare tire.

Warning!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for

temporary emergency use only. With these

spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have

limited tread life. When the tread is worn to

the tread wear indicators, the temporary

use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be

sure to follow the warnings, which apply to

your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary

emergency use only. This tire may look

like the originally equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is

not. This spare tire may have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the

tread wear indicators, the temporary

use full size spare tire needs to be

replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or

repair) the original equipment tire and

reinstall on the vehicle at the first

opportunity.

Limited Use Spare —

If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for

temporary emergency use only. This tire

is identified by a label located on the

limited use spare wheel. This label

contains the driving limitations for this

spare. This tire may look like the original

equipped tire on the front or rear axle of

your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of

this limited use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or

repair) the original equipment tire and

reinstall on the vehicle at the first

opportunity.

Warning!

Limited use spares are for emergency use

only. Installation of this limited use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,

do not drive more than the speed listed on

the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated

to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard

located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the

rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace

(or repair) the original equipment tire at the

first opportunity and reinstall it on your

vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss

of vehicle control.

257

Wheel And Wheel Trim

Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially

aluminum and chrome plated wheels,

should be cleaned regularly using mild

(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain

their luster and to prevent corrosion.

Wash wheels with the same soap solution

recommended for the body of the vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to

deterioration caused by salt, sodium

chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium

chloride, etc., and other road chemicals

used to melt ice or control dust on dirt

roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and

mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do

not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.

They can damage the wheel’s

protective coating that helps keep them

from corroding and tarnishing.

Note: Many aftermarket wheel

cleaners contain strong acids or strong

alkaline additives that can harm the

wheel surface.

Caution!

Avoid products or automatic car washes

that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline

additives or harsh brushes. These products

and automatic car washes may damage

the wheel's protective finish. Such damage

is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is

recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels

including excessive brake dust, care

must be taken in the selection of tire

and wheel cleaning chemicals and

equipment to prevent damage to the

wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or

Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their

equivalent is recommended or select a

non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for

aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not

use any products on Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will

permanently damage this finish and

such damage is not covered by the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a

bristle brush, metal polishes or oven

cleaner. These products may damage the

wheel's protective finish. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is

recommended.

Note: If you intend parking or storing

your vehicle for an extended period

after cleaning the wheels with wheel

cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few

minutes before doing so. Driving the

vehicle and applying the brakes when

stopping will reduce the risk of brake

rotor corrosion.

258

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome

Wheels

Caution!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor

or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT

USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing

compounds. They will permanently damage

this finish and such damage is not covered

by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE

ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A

SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this

is all that is required to maintain this finish.

Snow Chains

The use of snow chains should be in

compliance with local regulations of

each country. In certain countries, tires

marked with code M+S (Mud and

Snow) are considered as winter

equipment; therefore their use is

equivalent to that of the snow chains.

The snow chains may be applied only

to the front wheel tires. Check the

tension of the snow chains after the first

few feet have been driven.

Warning!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,

Snow) between front and rear axles can

cause unpredictable handling. You could

lose control and have a collision.

Caution!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,

observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other

suspension components, it is important

that only traction devices in good condition

are used. Broken devices can cause

serious damage. Stop the vehicle

immediately if noise occurs that could

indicate device breakage. Remove the

damaged parts of the device before further

use.

Install device as tightly as possible and

then retighten after driving about ½ mile

(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with a loaded

vehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period on

dry pavement.

Observe the traction device

manufacturer’s instructions on the method

of installation, operating speed, and

conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device

manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph

(48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on a

compact spare tire.

Caution!

Using snow chains with tires with

non-original dimensions may damage the

vehicle.

Using different size or type (M+S, snow,

etc.) tires between front and rear axle may

adversely affect vehicle driveability, with the

risk of losing control of the vehicle and

resulting accidents.

Tire Rotation

Recommendations

The front and rear tires are subject to

different loads and stress due to

steering, maneuver and braking. For

this reason they are subject to uneven

wear. To resolve this problem, tires

should be rotated at the appropriate

time.

The following rotation methods must

NOT be used with one-way

unidirectional tires! This type of tires can

only be switched from the front axle to

the rear axle and vice versa, keeping

them on the same side of the vehicle.

Rotate one-way unidirectional tires

and radial tires that have an

asymmetrical tread pattern only from

front to rear, not from side to side. Tire

performance will be reduced if rotated

from side to side.

259

Tire rotation means moving the wheels

to a different position, with respect to

the vehicle. During rotation, inspect tires

for correct balance.

The single wheel will therefore operate

on a different axle and, where possible,

on the opposite side of the vehicle.

Note:

Rotate tires periodically. Irregular tire

wear is dangerous. To equalize tread

wear for maintaining good

performance in handling and braking,

rotate the tires every 6,200 miles

(10,000 km), or sooner if irregular wear

develops.

To equalize tread wear, rotate the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) at

the latest or sooner if irregular wear

develops. FCA recommends to rotate

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) to help

increase tire life and distribute wear

more evenly.

Because your vehicle is not

equipped with a spare tire, you cannot

do a tire rotation safely with the jack

that may come with your vehicle if so

equipped. Contact an authorized

dealer for tire rotation.

Also, inspect them for uneven wear and

damage. Abnormal wear is usually

caused by one or a combination of the

following:

Incorrect tire pressure

Improper wheel alignment

Out-of-balance wheel

Severe braking

After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to

specification and inspect the wheel nuts

for tightness.

With Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS)

The TPM system must be initialized

after adjusting the tire pressure, to

make the system operate normally.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring

System” in “Safety” for further

information.

Rotate unidirectional tires and radial

tires that have an asymmetrical tread

pattern only from front to rear, not from

side to side. Tire performance will be

reduced if rotated from side to side.

DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE

QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading

categories were established by the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration. The specific grade

rating assigned by the tire's

manufacturer in each category is

shown on the sidewall of the tires

on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must

conform to Federal safety

requirements in addition to these

grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a

comparative rating, based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The

relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from

07031402-FRT-001

Rotation Diagram

260

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and

differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest

to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

These grades represent the tire's

ability to stop on wet pavement, as

measured under controlled

conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may

have poor traction performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests, and does

not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat,

when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of

performance, which all passenger

vehicle tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required

by law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or

excessive loading, either separately

or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

261

STORING THE

VEHICLE

If the vehicle is left inactive for longer

than a month, the following precautions

should be observed:

Park the vehicle in covered, dry and if

possible well-ventilated premises and

slightly open the windows.

Check that the parking brake is not

activated.

Disconnect the negative battery

terminal and check the battery charge.

Repeat this check once every three

months during storage.

If the battery is not disconnected

from the electrical system, check its

state of charge every thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted parts

using protective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metal

parts using special compounds

available commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on the

windshield and rear window wiper

rubber blades and lift them off the

glass.

Cover the vehicle with a fabric or

perforated plastic sheet, paying

particular care not to damage the

painted surface by dragging any dust

that may have accumulated on it. Do

not use compact plastic sheets which

do not allow humidity to evaporate from

the surface of the vehicle.

Inflate the tires at a pressure of

+7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher than

recommended on the tire placard and

check it periodically.

Do not drain the engine cooling

system.

Any time the vehicle is left inactive for

two weeks or more, operate the air

conditioning system with engine idling

for at least five minutes, setting external

air and with fan set to maximum speed.

This operation will ensure appropriate

lubrication for the system, thus

minimizing the possibility of damage to

the compressor when the system is

operated again.

Note: After placing the ignition in the

OFF mode and having closed the driver

side door, wait at least one minute

before disconnecting the electrical

supply from the battery. When

reconnecting the electrical supply to the

battery, make sure that the ignition in

the OFF mode and the driver side door

is closed.

BODYWORK

Protection From

Atmospheric Agents

The vehicle is equipped with the best

available technological solutions to

protect the bodywork against corrosion.

These include:

Painting products and systems

which give the vehicle resistance to

corrosion and abrasion.

Use of galvanized (or pre-treated)

steel sheets, with high resistance to

corrosion.

Spraying of plastic parts, with a

protective function in the more exposed

points: underdoor, inner fender, edges,

etc.

Use of “open” boxed sections to

prevent condensation and pockets of

moisture which could favor the

formation of rust inside.

Use of special films to protect

against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g.

rear fender, doors, etc.).

262

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Corrosion Warranty

Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion

Warranty against perforation due to rust

of any original element of the structure

or bodywork. For the general terms of

this Corrosion Warranty, refer to the

Warranty Booklet.

Preserving The

Paintwork

Touch up abrasions and scratches

immediately to prevent the formation of

rust.

Maintenance of paintwork consists of

washing the vehicle: the frequency

depends on the conditions and

environment in which the vehicle is

used.

For example, it is advisable to wash the

vehicle more often in areas with high

levels of atmospheric pollution or salted

roads.

To correctly wash the vehicle, follow

these instructions:

If high pressure jets or cleaners are

used to wash the vehicle, keep a

distance of at least 1.3 ft (40 cm) from

the bodywork to avoid damage or

alteration. Build up of water could

cause damage to the vehicle in the long

term.

Wash the vehicle using a low

pressure jet of water if possible.

Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy

solution over the bodywork, frequently

rinsing the sponge.

Rinse well with water and dry with a

jet of air or a chamois leather.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door

frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.)

with special care, as water may

stagnate more easily in these areas. Do

not wash the vehicle after it has been

left in the sun or with the hood hot: this

may alter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned

in the same way as the rest of the

vehicle.

Note:

Avoid parking under trees; the sap

dropped by trees makes the paint

work go dull and increases the

possibility of corrosion.

Bird droppings must be washed off

immediately and thoroughly as the acid

they contain is particularly aggressive.

Etching caused by acid rain or

industrial fallout

Cause:

Industrial pollutants and vehicle

emissions drift into the air and mix with

rain or dew to form acids. These acids

can settle on a vehicle's finish. As the

water evaporates, the acid becomes

concentrated and can damage the

finish.

The longer the acid remains on the

surface, the greater the chance is for

damage.

Prevention:

It is necessary to wash and wax your

vehicle to preserve its finish according

to the instructions in this section. These

steps should be taken immediately after

you suspect that acid rain has settled

on your vehicle's finish.

Damage caused by bird

dropping/insects/tree sap

Problem:

Bird droppings contain acids. If these

are not removed they can eat away the

clear and color base coat of the

vehicle's paintwork.

When insects stick to the paint surface

and decompose, corrosive compounds

form. These can erode the clear and color

base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if

they are not removed.

Tree sap will harden and adhere

permanently to the paint finish. If you

scratch the sap off while it is hard,

some vehicle paint could come off with

it.

Prevention:

It is necessary to have your vehicle

washed and waxed to preserve its finish

according to the instructions in this

section. This should be done as soon

as possible.

263

Bird droppings can be removed with a

soft sponge and water. If you are

travelling and these are not available, a

moistened tissue may also take care of

the problem. The cleaned area should

be waxed according to the instructions

in this section. Insects and tree sap are

best removed with a soft sponge and

water or a commercially available

chemical cleaner.

Another method is to cover the affected

area with dampened newspaper for one

to two hours. After removing the

newspaper, rinse off the loosened

debris with water.

Water marks

Problem:

Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can

contain harmful minerals such as salt

and lime. If moisture containing these

minerals settles on the vehicle and

evaporates, the minerals will

concentrate and harden to form white

rings. The rings can damage your

vehicle's finish.

Prevention:

It is necessary to wash and wax your

vehicle to preserve its finish according

to the instructions in this section. These

steps should be taken immediately after

you find water marks on your vehicle's

finish.

Paint chipping

Problem:

Paint chipping occurs when gravel

thrown in the air by another vehicle's

tires hits your vehicle.

How to avoid paint chipping:

Keeping a safe distance between you

and the vehicle ahead reduces the

chances of having your paint chipped

by flying gravel.

Note:

The paint chipping zone varies with

the speed of the vehicle. For example,

when travelling at 55 mph (90 km/h),

the paint chipping zone is 164 ft

(50 m).

In low temperatures, a vehicle's

finish hardens. This increases the

chance of paint chipping.

Chipped paint can lead to rust

forming on your vehicle. Before this

happens, repair the damage by using

FCA touch-up paint according to the

instructions in this section. Failure to

repair the affected area could lead to

serious rusting and expensive repairs.

Follow all label and container directions

when using a chemical cleaner or

polish. Read all warnings and cautions.

Maintaining The Finish

Washing

To help protect the finish from rust and

deterioration, wash your vehicle

thoroughly and frequently, at least once

a month, with lukewarm or cold water.

If the vehicle is washed improperly, the

paint surface could be scratched. Here

are some examples of how scratching

could occur:

The vehicle is washed without first

rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.

The vehicle is washed with a rough,

dry, or dirty cloth.

The vehicle is washed at a car wash

that uses brushes that are dirty or too

stiff.

Cleansers or wax containing

abrasives are used.

Note: FCA is not responsible for

scratches caused by automatic car

washes or improper washing.

Scratches are more noticeable on

vehicles with darker paint finishes.

When the wiper lever is in the AUTO

position and the ignition is placed in the

ON mode, the wipers may move

automatically in the following cases:

If the windshield above the rain

sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth.

If the windshield is struck with a hand

or other object from either outside or

inside the vehicle.

264

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Note:

Keep hands and scrapers clear of

the windshield when the wiper lever is

in the AUTO position and the ignition is

placed in the ON mode as fingers

could be pinched or the wipers and

wiper blades damaged when the

wipers activate automatically. If you are

going to clean the windshield, be sure

the wipers are turned off completely

(when it is most likely that the engine is

left running) this is particularly

important when clearing ice and snow.

Do not spray water in the engine

compartment. Otherwise, it could

result in engine-starting problems or

damage to electrical parts.

When washing and waxing the

vehicle, be careful not to apply

excessive force to any single area of

the vehicle hood. Otherwise, you could

dent the vehicle.

Do not use automatic car washing

machines and car washing devices

using high water pressure.

Make sure that the fuel door is

closed and lock the doors. Otherwise,

the fuel door may be forcefully opened

by water pressure causing damage to

the vehicle or fuel door.

To minimize scratches on the vehicle's

paint finish:

Rinse off any dirt or other foreign

matter using lukewarm or cold water

before washing.

Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water

and a soft cloth when washing the

vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.

Rub gently when washing or drying

the vehicle.

Take your vehicle only to a car wash

that keeps its brushes well maintained.

Do not use abrasive cleansers or

wax that contain abrasives.

Caution!

Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or

strong detergents containing highly alkaline

or caustic agents on chrome plated or

anodized aluminium parts. This may

damage the protective coating; also,

cleaners and detergents may discolor or

deteriorate the paint.

Pay special attention to removing salt,

dirt, mud, and other foreign material

from the underside of the fenders, and

make sure the drain holes in the lower

edges of the doors and rocker panels

are clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial fallout, and similar deposits

can damage the finish if not removed

immediately. When prompt washing

with plain water is ineffective, use a mild

soap made for use on vehicles.

Thoroughly rinse off all soap with

lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow

soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, dry it with a

clean chamois to prevent water spots

from forming.

Waxing

Your vehicle needs to be waxed when

water no longer beads on the finish.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing it. In addition to the vehicle

body, wax the metal trim to maintain its

lustre:

Use wax which contains no

abrasives. Waxes containing abrasive

will remove paint and could damage

bright metal parts.

Use a good grade of natural wax for

metallic, mica, and solid colors.

When waxing, coat evenly with the

sponge supplied or a soft cloth.

Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.

Note: A spot remover to remove oil,

tar, and similar materials will usually also

take off the wax. Rewax these areas

even if the rest of the vehicle does not

need it.

265

Repairing Damage To

The Finish

Deep scratches or chips on the finish

should be repaired promptly. Exposed

metal quickly rusts and can lead to

major repairs.

Note: If your vehicle is damaged and

needs metal parts repaired or replaced,

make sure the body shop applies

corrosion prevention materials to all

parts, both repaired and new. This will

prevent them from rusting.

Bright-Metal Maintenance

Use tar remover to remove road tar and

insects. Never do this with a knife or

similar tool.

To prevent corrosion on brigh-tmetal

surfaces, apply wax or chrome

preservative and rub it to a high lustre.

During cold weather or in coastal areas,

cover bright-metal parts with a coating of

wax or preservative heavier than usual. It

would also help to coat them with

noncorrosive petroleum jelly or some

other protective compound.

Caution!

Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or

strong detergents containing highly alkaline

or caustic agents on chrome plated or

anodized aluminium parts. This may result

in damage to the protective coating and

cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Underbody Maintenance

Road chemicals and salt used for ice

and snow removal and solvents used

for dust control may collect on the

underbody. If not removed, they will

speed up rusting and deterioration of

such underbody parts as fuel lines,

frame, floor pan, and exhaust system,

even though these parts may be coated

with anti-corrosive material.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and

wheel housings with lukewarm or cold

water at the end of each winter. Try also

to do this every month.

Pay special attention to these areas

because they easily hide mud and dirt.

It will do more harm than good to wet

down the road grime without removing

it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have drain

holes that should not be clogged.

Water trapped there will cause rusting.

Aluminium Wheel

Maintenance

A protective coating is provided over

the aluminium wheels. Special care is

needed to protect this coating.

Note: Do not use any detergent other

than mild detergent. Before using any

detergent, verify the ingredients.

Otherwise, the product could discolor

or stain the aluminium wheels.

Caution!

Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive

cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on

aluminium wheels. They may damage the

coating.

Note: Always use a sponge or soft

cloth to clean the wheels. Rinse the

wheels thoroughly with lukewarm or

cold water. Also, be sure to clean the

wheels after driving on dusty or salted

roads to help prevent corrosion.

Convertible Top

Maintenance

The convertible top is made of a special

high-grade material, but if it's not taken

good care of, hardening, staining, and

loss of lustre will result. Maintain it

under these guidelines.

Washing

Do not wait until the convertible top

gets really dirty before cleaning it. Dirt

that's there too long will cause

deterioration.

Before washing, remove dust and

coarse particulate with a soft brush.

Gently clean the convertible top with

a synthetic neutral detergent, lots of

water, and a soft brush.

266

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Rinse it thoroughly with clean water

to remove all the soap.

Wipe it as dry as you can before the

water dries on it.

Then allow it to dry completely before

lowering it.

Caution!

Automatic and high-pressure car

washes are harmful to a convertible top.

Avoid them.

Do not spray water directly on the area

where the window glass and the

convertible top meet. This would probably

cause water to enter the interior.

Do not spray water directly on the seam

area of the body and the convertible top as

it could result in water penetrating the

interior.

Do not wipe the convertible top using

alcohol, chlorine bleach, or organic

solvents such as thinner, benzene, or

gasoline. Otherwise, they may cause

discoloration or stains.

Too much treatment on the convertible

top can be as damaging as too little. Follow

the manufacturer's directions. Do not over

do it!

Note:

Some leather treatment products

can ruin the convertible top's gloss. Be

careful of the one you choose.

Test on an inconspicuous, small

corner of the convertible top if you are

not sure.

Do not get any car wax on the

convertible top.

If you do, remove it with a good

leather cleaner or mild detergent

(about 5% solution).

Let the convertible top dry

completely before lowering after

applying treatment or dressing.

Drain Filter Cleaning

If leaves or other matter block the drain

filter, water may enter the vehicle. Clean

the drain filter at least once a year.

Proceed as follows:

1. Check the position of the drain filter

with your hand from behind the bow.

2. Remove the drain filter while

pressing the tab.

07040110-122-001AB

Drain Filter

07040110123001

Drain Filter Location

1 — Drain Filter

2—Bow

07040110124001

Drain Filter Tab

267

3. Remove leaves and other matter

accumulated in the drain filter.

4. Reinstall the drain filter in the reverse

order of the removal procedure.

Note: Make sure that the drain filter is

securely attached to its designated

position by pushing it until the tab

locks. Water may enter the vehicle if the

drain filter is not secured to its

designated position. For this operation

go to an authorized dealer.

Plastic Part

Maintenance

When cleaning the plastic lenses of the

lights, do not use gasoline, paraffin,

rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly

acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline

detergents.

Otherwise, these chemical agents can

discolor or damage the surfaces

resulting in a significant loss in

functionality. If plastic parts become

inadvertently exposed to any of these

chemical agents, flush with water

immediately.

If plastic parts such as the bumpers

become inadvertently exposed to

chemical agents or fluids such as

gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery

fluid, it could cause discoloration,

staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any

such chemical agents or fluids using a

soft cloth immediately.

Caution!

High water temperature and high water

pressure car washers are available

depending on the type of high pressure car

washer device. If the car washer nozzle is

put too close to the vehicle or aimed at one

area for an extended period of time, it

could deform plastic parts or damage the

paint.

Do not use wax containing compounds

(polish). Otherwise, it could result in paint

damage.

In addition, do not use an electrical or air

tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the frictional

heat generated could result in deformation

of plastic parts or paint damage.

INTERIORS

Seats And Fabric Parts

Warning!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning

purposes. Many are potentially flammable,

and if used in closed areas they may cause

respiratory harm.

Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: they

might explode. Aerosol cans must not be

exposed to a temperature exceeding

122°F (50°C). When the vehicle is exposed

to sunlight the internal temperature can

greatly exceed this value.

Caution!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect

repellents, suntan lotions, or hand

sanitizers, to the plastic, painted, or

decorated surfaces of the interior may

cause permanent damage. Wipe away

immediately.

Damage caused by these type of

products may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Rubbing the interior side of the

convertible top vigorously with a stiff brush

or cloth may cause damage.

268

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl

cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean it with a mild soap solution good

for upholstery and carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner.

To keep the fabric looking clean and

fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color

will be affected, it can be stained easily,

and its fire-resistance may be reduced.

Note: Use only recommended cleaners

and procedures. Others may affect

appearance and fire-resistance.

Interior Panels

When the interior panels need to be

cleaned, use soft material such as a

soft cloth soaked in clean water and

wrung out well and lightly wipe off dirt

from the surface.

If a panel requires further cleaning, wipe

dirt off using a soft cloth soaked in mild

detergent (about 5% solution) and wipe

off any remaining detergent using a

cloth soaked in clean water and wrung

out well.

Caution!

Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol,

chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such

as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise,

it may cause discoloration or stains.

Note:

Scratches or nicks on the panels

and metallic trim resulting from the use

of a hard brush or cloth may not be

repairable.

Be particularly careful when

cleaning high gloss panels and metallic

trim as they can be easily scratched.

Lap / Shoulder Belt

Warning!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the system. Seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision if they have been

damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn

webbing, etc.).

Clean the webbing with a mild soap

solution recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Follow instructions. Do not

bleach or dye the belts, this may

weaken them.

After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry

the belt webbing and make sure there

is no remaining moisture before

retracting them.

Plastic And Coated

Parts

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp

cloth (if possible made from microfiber),

and a solution of water and neutral,

non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, use

specific products free from solvents and

designed to maintain the original

appearance and color of the

components.

Remove any dust using a microfiber

cloth, if necessary moistened with

water. The use of paper tissues is not

recommended as these may leave

residues.

Instrument panel precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oils from

contacting the instrument panel. They

will damage and discolor the instrument

panel. If these solutions get on the

instrument panel, wipe them off

immediately.

269

Note: Never use alcohol, gasoline and

derivatives to clean the instrument

panel lens.

Caution!

Do not use glazing agents. Glazing agents

contain ingredients which may cause

discoloration, wrinkling, cracks and peeling.

Instrument Panel Top

When cleaning, it is recommended that

you use a clean towel dampened in a

mild detergent to remove debris.

Caution!

If the surface is rubbed harshly, it could

result in the surface being damaged leaving

white scratch marks.

Window Interiors

If the windows become covered with an

oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them

with glass cleaner. Follow the directions

on the container.

Note: Do not scrape or scratch the

inside of the window glass. It could

damage the thermal filaments.

Caution!

When washing the inside of the window

glass, use a soft cloth dampened in

lukewarm water, gently wiping the thermal

filaments. Use of glass cleaning products

could damage the thermal filaments.

Leather Parts —

If Equipped

Caution!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based

and/or Ketone based cleaning products to

clean leather seats, as damage to the seat

may result.

Remove dust and sand first using a

vacuum cleaner or other means, then

wipe dirt off using a soft cloth with a

leather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in

mild soap.

Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap

using a cloth soaked in clean water and

wrung out well.

Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth

and allow the leather to further dry in a

well-ventilated, shaded area.

If the leather gets wet such as from

rain, also remove moisture and dry it as

soon as possible.

Note:

Because genuine leather is a natural

material, its surface is not uniform and

it may have natural scars, scratches,

and wrinkles.

To maintain the quality for as long

as possible, periodical maintenance,

about twice a year, is recommended.

270

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Caution!

Sand and dust on the seat surface may

damage the overcoat of the genuine

leather surfaces and accelerate wear

Greasy soiling on genuine leather may

cause molding and stains.

Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth

may cause damage.

Do not wipe the leather using alcohol,

chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such

as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise,

it may cause discoloration or stains.

If the seats get wet, promptly remove

moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining

moisture on the surface may cause

deterioration such as hardening and

shrinkage.

Exposure to direct sunlight for long

periods may cause deterioration and

shrinkage. When parking the car under

direct sunlight for long periods, shade the

interior using sunshades.

Do not leave vinyl products on the seats

for long periods as they may affect the

leather quality and coloring. If the cabin

temperature becomes hot, the vinyl may

deteriorate and adhere to the genuine

leather.

271

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ........273

RECOMMENDED TIRE

INFLATION PRESSURE ........274

ENGINE..................276

TRANSMISSION ............277

BRAKES .................278

SUSPENSIONS .............279

STEERING ................280

DIMENSIONS ..............281

FLUID CAPACITIES ..........283

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....284

PERFORMANCE ............286

272

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION

DATA

Identification Numbers

Model Plate

The model plate is located on the left

side of door pillar.

Chassis Number/Vehicle

Identification Number

The Vehicle Identification Number is

located below the left side (driver side)

of the windshield.

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

Label

(U.S.A. and Canada)

The motor vehicle safety standard label

is located on the left side of door pillar.

Vehicle Emission Control

Information Label

(U.S.A. and Canada)

The vehicle emission control information

label is located under the hood.

Tire Pressure Label

The tire pressure label is located on the

left side of door pillar.

Engine Number

The engine number label is located on

the engine.

10010103121001

Model Plate Location

10010104-122-001AB

Vehicle Identification Number

10010109-121-001

Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard Label

10010106-121-001

Vehicle Emission Control

Information Label

10010107-121-002

Tire Pressure Label

273

RECOMMENDED

TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURE

On the tire label you will find the

recommended tire inflation pressure in

both psi and kPa for the tires installed

as original equipment on the vehicle.

It is very important that the inflation

pressure of the tires on your vehicle is

maintained at the recommended

pressure.

You should check the tire pressure

regularly to insure that the proper

inflation pressure is maintained.

Note:

Tire pressures listed on the vehicle

placard or tire information label indicate

the recommended cold tire inflation

pressure, measured when the tires are

cold, after the vehicle has been parked

for at least three hours. As you drive,

the temperature in the tire warms up,

increasing the tire pressure.

Always check the tire inflation

pressures on a regular basis according

to the recommended tire inflation

pressure on the tire label and in

conjunction with the information in this

Owner's Manual. Driving your vehicle

with under-inflated tires is dangerous.

Under-inflation is the most common

cause of failures in any kind of tire and

may result in severe cracking, tread

separation or “blowout”, with

unexpected loss of vehicle control and

increased risk of injury. Under-inflation

increases sidewall flexing and rolling

resistance, resulting in heat buildup and

internal damage to the tire. It results in

unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear,

loss of control and accidents. A tire can

lose up to half of its air pressure and not

appear to be flat. It is impossible to

determine whether or not tires are

properly inflated just by looking at them.

Checking Tire Pressure

Proceed as follows:

1. When you check the air pressure,

make sure the tires are cold - meaning

they are not hot from driving even a

mile.

2. Remove the cap from the valve on

one tire.

3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the

valve.

4. Add air to achieve recommended air

pressure.

5. If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the center

of the valve. Then recheck the pressure

with your tire gauge.

6. Replace the valve cap.

7. Visually inspect the tires to make

sure there are no nails or other objects

embedded that could poke a hole in the

tire and cause an air leak.

8. Check the sidewalls to make sure

there are no gouges, cuts, bulges,

cracks or other irregularities.

274

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Glossary Of Terms

Tire Placard

A label indicating the OE (Original

Equipment) tire sizes, recommended

inflation pressure, and the maximum

weight the vehicle can carry.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

A number on the sidewall of each tire

providing information about the tire

brand and manufacturing plant, tire

size, and date of manufacture.

Inflation Pressure

A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

kPa

Kilopascal, the metric unit for air

pressure.

psi

Pounds per square inch, the English

unit for air pressure.

B-pillar

The structural member at the side of

the vehicle behind the front door.

Original Equipment (OE)

Describes components originally

equipped on the vehicle.

Vehicle Load Limit

The maximum value of the combination

weight of occupants and cargo.

Bead Area of the Tire

Area of the tire next to the rim.

Sidewall Area of the Tire

Area between the bead area and the

tread.

Tread Area of the Tire

Area on the perimeter of the tire that

contacts the road when it's mounted

on the vehicle.

275

ENGINE

Engine

1.4 Turbo Multi Air

Cycle Four

Number

and position of cylinders 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 80.4

Total displacement (cm³) 1368

Compression ratio 9.8:1

Maximum power (kW) 122

Maximum power (HP) 164

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500

Maximum torque (Nm) 250

Maximum torque (lb.-ft.) 184

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500

Spark plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

Fuel

91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) Maximum

15% Ethanol Content

Note: When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum

tips could be damaged.

Warning!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into

account, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

276

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TRANSMISSION

Engine Traction Type Description

1.4 Turbo Multi Air R

WD Manual/Automatic

6-speed manual

(*) / 6-speed

Automatic Transmission(**)

(*) If equipped with manual transmission

(**) If equipped with automatic transmission

277

BRAKES

Engine Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

1.4 Turbo Multi Air

entilated

(floating type 11 in diameter)

Solid

(floating type 11 in diameter)

Mechanical

(lever type)

Note: Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the

brakes are applied.

278

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SUSPENSIONS

Engine Front Rear

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Double

wishbone with stabilizer bars Multilink with stabilizer bars

279

STEERING

Engine Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m) Type

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 30.8

(9.4)

Double pinion electric power assist system

(DP - EPAS) - rack and pinion

280

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with

vehicle unloaded.

Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters)

ABCDEF

159.6 (4054 mm) 90.9 (2309 mm) 48.5 (1232 mm) 58.9 (1496 mm) 68.5 (1740 mm) 59.1 (1503 mm)

10000555-122-333AB

Vehicle Dimension Chart

281

Weights

Curb Weight: 2477 lbs (1124 kg) (if

equipped with manual transmission) /

2516 lbs (1141 kg) (if equipped with

automatic transmission).

282

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FLUID CAPACITIES

Item Capacities

Fuel tank 11.9

(gallons) / 45 (liters)

Engine oil (without oil filter replacement) 3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters)

Engine oil (with oil filter replacement) 4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters)

Coolant (with manual transmission) 7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters)

Coolant (with automatic transmission) 7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters)

Manual transmission oil 2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters)

Automatic transmission fluid 7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters)

Rear differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)

Limited slip differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)

Brake fluid (& clutch fluid) 0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

283

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Fluids And Lubricants

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of

the Scheduled Servicing Plan.

Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is

crucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant Specification Replacement interval

Engine oil

e recommend you use API Certified SAE

5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap

for correct SAE grade.

According to Scheduled Servicing Plan

Coolant

Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for

FIAT Spider

According to Scheduled Servicing Plan

Manual transmission oil

Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life Gear

Oil for FIAT Spider

Automatic transmission fluid

Mopar Automatic Transmission Long Life

Fluid for FIAT Spider

Rear differential oil

Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil

for FIAT Spider

Limited slip differential oil

Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive

for FIAT Spider

Brake/clutch fluid

We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.

If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available,

then DOT 4 is acceptable.

If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required

characteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

284

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Caution!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in

engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be

mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a

non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,

flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as

they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

285

PERFORMANCE

Performance

Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version MPH (km/h)

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 164HP 130 (209.2)

286

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING

SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .288

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .....288

WARRANTYINFORMATION.....290

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .290

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .291

287

SUGGESTIONS FOR

OBTAINING SERVICE

FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The

Appointment

If you are having warranty work done,

be sure to bring the right papers with

you, as well as your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be

covered by the warranty. Discuss

additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of

your vehicle's service history, as this

can often provide a clue to the current

problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's

problems or the specific work you want

done. If you've had an accident or work

done that is not on your maintenance

log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With

Requests

If you list a number of items and you

must have your vehicle by the end of

the day, discuss the situation with the

service advisor and list the items in

order of priority. At many authorized

dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle

at a minimal daily charge. If you need a

rental, it is advisable to make these

arrangements when you call for an

appointment.

IF YOU NEED

ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized

dealer are vitally interested in your

satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an

authorized dealer. We strongly

recommend that you take the vehicle to

an authorized dealer. They know your

vehicle the best, and are most concerned

that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer's authorized

dealer have the facilities, factory-trained

technicians, special tools, and the latest

information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an

authorized dealer service manager first.

Most matters can be resolved with this

process.

If for some reason you are still not

satisfied, talk to the general manager or

owner of the authorized dealer. They

want to know if you need assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable to

resolve the concern, you may contact

the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the

manufacturer's customer center should

include the following information:

Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (home

and office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FIAT Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI

48321–8004

Phone:

1-888-242-6342

FIAT Canada Customer

Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)

387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma,

1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City:

1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S.

Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International

Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

288

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Customer Assistance

For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired

(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing

difficulties, the manufacturer has

installed special TDD

(Telecommunication Devices for the

Deaf) equipment at its customer center.

Any hearing or speech impaired

customer, who has access to a TDD or

a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in

the United States, can communicate

with the manufacturer by dialing

1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing

difficulties that require assistance can

use the special needs relay service

offered by Bell Canada. For TTY

teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for

Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to

connect with a Bell Relay Service

operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service

contract for a vehicle to help protect

you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer's New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The

manufacturer stands behind only the

manufacturer's service contracts. If you

purchased a manufacturer's service

contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification

Card in the mail within three weeks of

the vehicle delivery date. If you have

any questions about the service

contract, call the manufacturer's

Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian

residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /

(800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind

any service contract that is not the

manufacturer's service contract. It is

not responsible for any service contract

other than the manufacturer's service

contract. If you purchased a service

contract that is not a manufacturer's

service contract, and you require

service after the manufacturer's New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,

please refer to the contract documents,

and contact the person listed in those

documents.

We appreciate that you have made a

major investment when you purchased

the vehicle. An authorized dealer has

also made a major investment in

facilities, tools, and training to assure

that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be

pleased with their sincere efforts to

resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

Warning!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion

engines only), some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain, or

emit, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

defects, or other reproductive harm. In

addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

289

WARRANTY

INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet,

for the terms and provisions of FCA US

LLC warranties applicable to this

vehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS

In The 50 United States

And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect that could cause a crash

or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National

Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your authorized dealer or FCA US

LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call

the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to

http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov .

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has

a safety defect, you should contact

the Customer Service Department

immediately. Canadian customers

who wish to report a safety defect

to the Canadian government should

contact Transport Canada, Motor

Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

290

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

PUBLICATION

ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you

may use either the website or the

phone numbers listed below. Visa,

Mastercard, American Express, and

Discover orders are accepted.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals

provide the information that students

and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem

solving, maintaining, servicing, and

repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the

vehicle, system, and/or components is

written in straightforward language with

illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled

with diagrams, charts and detailed

illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and

technicians to find and fix problems on

computer-controlled vehicle systems

and features. They show exactly how to

find and correct problems the first time,

using step-by-step troubleshooting and

drivability procedures, proven

diagnostic tests, and a complete list of

all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been

prepared with the assistance of service

and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.

Included are starting, operating,

emergency and maintenance

procedures as well as specifications,

capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

291

INDEX

About Your Brakes ...........154

ABS system................114

Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ......160

Adaptive Front Lighting System

(AFS) ...................42

Additives, Fuel ..............178

Advanced Keyless Entry System

Key Left In Trunk ............22

Key left In Vehicle ...........22

Locking Doors .............22

Passive Entry ..............22

Request Switch ............22

Unlocking Doors ............22

AirBag................134,138

Advance Front Air Bag . . . .134,138

Air Bag Warning Light .......151

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .150,228

FrontAirBag .............151

Maintaining Your Air

Bag System .............150

Air Bag Maintenance ..........150

Air Pressure, Tires ............252

Alarm

Vehicle Security Alarm ......24,25

Alarm (Security Alarm) ........24,25

Aluminium wheel maintenance . . . .266

Automatic Dimming Mirror........37

Automatic Headlights...........40

Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC) ...................52

Automatic Transmission ........157

Auxiliary Power Outlet ..........63

B-Pillar Location .............249

Battery (maintenance)..........240

Battery charging procedure ......241

Battery recharging ............241

Blind Spot Monitoring..........116

Body and underbody warranty . . . .263

Body lubrication .............241

Bodywork (care and maintenance). .262

Boot, Convertible Top Lowering ....70

Boot, Convertible Top Precautions . .73

Boot, Convertible Top Raising .....72

Brake System...............154

Brake/clutch fluid (level check) . . . .239

Brakes ................154,278

Bright-metal maintenance ......

.266

Camera,

Rear...............171

Carbon Monoxide Warning ......179

Center Seat Storage Compartment.......................61

Certification Label ............181

Changing A Flat Tire.....208,209,243

Chart, Tire Sizing.............245

Check Engine Light (Malfunction

Indicator Light) ............112

Checking levels ..............237

Child Restraint ..............131

Child Restraints

Child Restraints ...........131

Clean Air Gasoline ............177

Cleaning

Wheels ................258

Climate Control ..............45

Close The Hood ..............69

Compact Spare Tire...........256

Contract, Service ............289

Convertible Top ..............70

Convertible top maintenance .....266

Cooling

Air Conditioning ............50

Cupholders .................64

Customer Assistance ..........288

Data Recorder, Event ..........150

Daytime Running Lights .........40

Diagnostic System, Onboard .....111

Dimensions ................281

Disabled Vehicle Towing .....226,228

Driver's Seat Back Tilt ..........33

Driving in flooded area .........186

Driving tips ................182

Electric power steering ..........74

Electric Remote Mirrors .........37

INDEX

Electronic Brake Control System

Traction Control System ......115

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise

Control) .................163

Emergency fuel filler door release . .180

Emergency Key ..............17

Emergency, In Case Of .........213

Hazard Warning Flasher ......189

Jacking ..........208,209,243

Jump Starting .........223,224

Overheating .............225

Towing ..............226,228

Emission control system .........74

Emission Control System

Maintenance..............112

Engine ...................276

Exhaust Gas Caution ........179

Fails To Start .............225

Flooded, Starting ..........225

Jump Starting .........223,224

Overheating .............225

Starting ..............20,224

Engine compartment ..........237

Engine coolant (level check) ......238

Engine oil (level check) .........238

Environment protection systems ....74

Essential information ............3

Ethanol ...................177

Event Data Recorder ..........150

Exhaust Gas Caution ..........179

Exterior Lights ...............38

Flash-To-Pass ...............40

Flashers

Hazard Warning ...........189

Turn Signal ...............41

Flooded Engine Starting ........225

Fluid And Lubricants ..........284

Fluid Capacities .............283

Fog Lights..................41

Follow Me Home .............41

Front lights (light bulbs) ........

.192

ont Wipers

Wiper Operation ...........43

Fuel

Additives ...............178

Clean Air ...............177

Ethanol ................177

Materials Added ...........178

Methanol ...............177

Fuel Consumption Display........86

Fuel Economy Monitor ..........86

Fuel filler cap ...............179

Fuel filler door...............179

Fuse block (engine compartment) . .202

Fuse block (interior) ...........206

Fuses (interior) ..............200

Fuses (underhood)............201

Gasoline, Clean Air ...........177

Gasoline, Reformulated ........177

Gear selector positions .........158

GVWR...................181

Hazard Warning Flasher ........189

Hazardous driving ............183

Head Restraints ............34,35

Headlight ..................38

Headlights

Adjusting The Headlight Abroad.......................42

High Beam ...............40

Passing .................40

Heavy-duty use of the vehicle

(scheduled servicing) ........231

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .58

Hood Release ...............69

How to use this manual ..........3

Identification Data ............273

Inside Rearview Mirror ..........36

Instrument Cluster Display

Information Display ........77,78

Interior Lights ................62

Interiors ..................268

Internal Equipment ............61

Jack Location ...............208

Jack Operation ........208,209,243

Jump Starting............223,224

KeyFob...................14

Emergency Key ............14

Programming Additional Key

Fobs ...................24

Key-In Reminder..............20

Lane Change And Turn Signals ....41

Lane Change Assist............42

Lap/Shoulder Belts ........125,127

Leaving Home Light System ......42

Life Of Tires ................254

Lights

Daytime Running ...........40

Fog ...................41

Hazard Warning Flasher ......189

Passing .................40

Turn Signal ...............41

Loading Vehicle .............181

Tires ..................249

Locks

PowerDoor ............27,31

Maintaining the finish ..........264

Maintenance Monitor ...........83

Maintenance procedures........241

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check

Engine) .................112

Manual Climate Control System ....48

Heating .................50

Manual transmission ..........156

Manual, Service .............291

Methanol..................177

Mirrors....................36

Automatic Dimming .........37

Electric Remote ............37

Exterior Folding ............38

Outside .................36

Rearview ................36

Occupant Restraints ..........124

Onboard Diagnostic System .....111

Operating Precautions .........111

Outside Rearview Mirrors ........36

Overhead light (bulb replacement) . .199

Overheating, Engine...........225

Overloading ................187

Owner's Manual

(Operator Manual) ..........291

Paint damage touch-up ........266

Parking Brake...............155

Passing Light ................

Performance ...............286

Periodic checks (scheduled

servicing) ................231

Personal Settings ............107

Personalization Features ........107

Placard, Tire And Loading

Information ...............249

Plastic part maintenance........268

Power

Brakes .................154

Door Locks ............27,31

Mirrors .................37

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .126

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ..............130

Protection from atmospheric

agents (bodywork) ..........262

Radar Sensors ..............166

Radial Ply Tires ..............253

Radio Frequency

General Information ........20,24

Radio transmitter and mobile

phones ...................4

Rear Camera ...............171

Rear lights (light bulbs) .........192

Rear Park Assist System........167

Rearview Mirrors..............36

Recommended Tire Inflation

Pressure ................274

Recorder, Event Data ..........150

Recreational towing ...........182

Reformulated Gasoline .........177

Refueling procedure...........179

Refueling the vehicle ..........177

Reminder, Seat Belt ...........130

Replacement Tires ............254

Replacing a bulb .............189

INDEX

Replacing exterior light bulbs .....192

Replacing fuses .............200

Replacing interior light bulbs .....199

Reporting Safety Defects .......290

Restraint, Head ..............34

Restraints, Child .............131

Safety Defects, Reporting .......290

Safety Information, Tire .........244

safety systems ..............114

Saving fuel and protection

of the environment ..........183

Scheduled servicing...........230

Seat Belt

Energy Management Feature . . .130

Lap/Shoulder Belts ......125,127

Pregnant Women ..........126

Seat Belt Extender .........129

Seat Belt Pretensioner .......130

Seat Belt Reminder .........130

Seat Belt Reminder ...........130

Seat Belts .................125

Child Restraint ............131

Extender ...............129

Front Seat ..............125

Pregnant Women ..........126

Pretensioners ............130

Rear Seat ...............125

Seats .....................33

Adjustment ...............33

Heated .................33

Seatback Release ..........33

Tilting ..................33

Seats and fabric parts (cleaning) . . .268

Security Alarm

Security Alarm ...........24,25

Sentry Key

Key Programming ..........24

Service Assistance ...........288

Service Contract .............289

Service Manuals .............291

Shift Lever Override

...........160

Shift

position indication .........158

Shoulder Belts ...........125,127

Signals, Turn ................41

Snow chains ...............259

Snow Tires ................256

Spare Tire ...........208,256,257

Sport Mode ................163

Starting ................20,224

Engine Fails To Start ........225

Starting And Operating.......20,224

Starting Procedures .........20,224

Starting the engine ...........153

Steering ..................280

Column Lock .............35

Tilt Column ...............35

Wheel, Tilt ...............35

Storage ...................61

Storing the vehicle ............262

Sun Visor ..................62

Supplemental Restraint System -

AirBag ..............134,138

Suspensions ...............279

Symbols....................3

Tilt Steering Column ...........35

Tire And Loading Information

Placard .................249

Tire chains.................185

Tire Markings ...............244

Tire Rotation ...............259

Tire Safety Information .........244

Tire Service Kit ..............213

Tires...............252,256,260

Aging (Life Of Tires) .........254

Air Pressure .............252

Changing .........208,209,243

Compact Spare ...........256

Flat Changing ............213

General Information .....

.252,256

High

Speed .............253

Inflation Pressures .........252

Jacking ..........208,209,243

Life Of Tires .............254

Load Capacity ............249

Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS) ................116

Quality Grading ...........260

Radial .................253

Replacement .............254

Safety ..............244,252

Sizes ..................245

Snow Tires ..............256

Spare Tire .........208,256,257

Spinning ...............253

Tread Wear Indicators .......254

ToOpenDeckLid.............66

ToOpenHood...............69

Towing

Disabled Vehicle ........226,228

Towing Eyes................226

Towing trailers ..............182

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) .................122

Transmission ...............277

Tread Wear Indicators..........254

Trunk Lid

Closing ..................68

Opening .................66

Trunk light (bulb replacement).....199

Turn Signals.................41

Undercoating ...............266

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......260

Vehicle Loading ..........181,249

Vehicle modifications/alterations .....4

Vent Operation ...............46

Warning Flasher, Hazard ........189

Warranty Information ..........290

Washer Operation ...........43,44

Washers, Windshield ...........43

Wheel And Wheel Trim .........258

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ......258

Wheels and tires .............244

Window and headlight washer fluid

(level check) ..............240

Window interiors (cleaning) ......270

indows

Driver/Passenger Window

Controls .................56

Power Windows ...........56

Window Lockout ...........58

Windshield wiper blades

(replacing) ...............242

Windshield Wipers ............43

Windstop ..................66

Winter driving ...............185

Wiper blades ...............242

Wrecker Towing ..........226,228

INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

OWNER’S MANUAL

2017

2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH

Fourth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group

Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.

17BAFX124-126-AD

FIAT

124 SPIDER ABARTH

FIAT 2017 124 Spider Abarth compact 2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Fiat 2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH Questions and Answers

Related Products

COSTWAY NP11716 Convertible 3-Seat Patio Porch Swing Chair to Flat Bed

Diono 50622 Radian 3R, 3-in-1 Convertible Car Seat, Rear Facing & Forward Facing, 10 Years 1 Car Seat, Slim Fit 3 Across, Red Cherry

Diono 50624 Radian 3R, 3-in-1 Convertible Car Seat, Rear Facing & Forward Facing, 10 Years 1 Car Seat, Slim Fit 3 Across, Pink Blossom

Diono 50623 Radian 3R, 3-in-1 Convertible Car Seat, Rear Facing & Forward Facing, 10 Years 1 Car Seat, Slim Fit 3 Across, Blue Sky

Diono 50620 Radian 3R, 3-in-1 Convertible Car Seat, Rear Facing & Forward Facing, 10 Years 1 Car Seat, Slim Fit 3 Across, Jet

Diono 50625 Radian 3R, 3-in-1 Convertible Car Seat, Rear Facing & Forward Facing, 10 Years 1 Car Seat, Slim Fit 3 Across, Gray Slate